JP7063369B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above-mentioned problems includes a picture display means for variablely displaying a picture and a picture display means.
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
The stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means, and the stop operation means.
A normal game operation in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means that controls the picture display means so as to be performed,
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the normal game operation is executed at each game time.
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. In a gaming machine where the corresponding profit is given to the player
A predetermined state setting means for terminating one execution time of the predetermined game state when the game time that triggers the end is executed in the predetermined game state.
An execution determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed.
The specific state setting means for setting the specific game state in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, and the specific state setting means.
When it is determined by the execution determining means to grant the privilege to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the pattern display is performed in the specific gaming state started before the privilege is granted. It is not determined by the execution determining means that the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed by using the pattern in the means, and the privilege is given to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed. In that case, in the specific game state started when one execution of the predetermined game state is completed, the unit effect corresponding to the non-granting result is executed by using the pattern in the pattern display means. Execution control means and
Equipped with
The effect execution control means is
In the unit effect corresponding to the grant result, a means for changing the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means from a predetermined pre-start mode to a variable display of the pattern and then setting the stop mode for the grant.
In the unit effect corresponding to the non-granting result, the means for changing the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means from the predetermined pre-start mode to the predetermined pre-start mode after the pattern is variedly displayed.
Equipped with
In the unit effect, the variation display of the pattern is performed in a mode different from the variation display mode of the pattern executed in the normal game operation .
The unit effect is characterized in that it ends independently of the operation of the stop operation means .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window, and a combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the stop symbol at the time of each winning. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a normal mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a normal mode is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning determination process which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the lottery mode and the transition mode of a lottery mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for 1st RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode which holds when the lottery table for 2nd RT mode is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for a bonus RT mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels, and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a bonus RT mode is selected. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process of the lottery mode executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the non-AT processing executed by the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process in AT which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus preparation state processing which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a time chart showing how the bonus state is executed. It is a time chart showing how the bonus state is executed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area of the main RAM used for executing a continuation chance period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the times notification image. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus RT management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus state processing which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation mode of the reel in (a)-(d) unit staging. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the continuation period of (a)-(c) continuation chance period is extended. It is a time chart showing how the continuation chance period progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the start of the continuation chance period executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chance executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the storage area executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during unit production executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation process executed in the main MPU. It is a time chart which shows the progress contents of the continuation chance period when a cancel operation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the end branch process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART preparation state processing which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state processing executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a time chart which shows how the ART end branch state is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the ART end branch process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification process which is executed in the sub-side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table referred to in the lottery process of stop order notification. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of slot machines are installed, and (b) is a front view of an external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the storage area of the main RAM used for executing the continuation chance period in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus RT management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chance executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation process executed by the main MPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing executed by the sub-side MPU, and (b) the content of the effect which makes the player recognizable that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result did not exist. It is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating (c) the content of the effect which makes the player recognizable that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result existed. It is a flowchart which shows the process for continuation chance executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation process executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the cancellation process executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state processing which is executed in the sub-side MPU in the 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the left side portion as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying the player of the game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

Each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotationally driven individually, that is, independently by driving each stepping motor. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. If the start lever 41 is operated while the medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state where they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal is awarded. And until the execution of various processes such as the management of the game state is completed, it corresponds to one game (game times).

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 when the insertion is possible by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and when the insertion is not possible, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medal ejection port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59. The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal ejection port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of medals is established on the effective line. ..

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when a medal inserted in the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A checkout button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 has a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting states of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". It includes a setting key insertion hole 57, which is operated to change within the range of "setting 6".

<Designs attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 3 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible to the main control device 70 from the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "replay 1" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), and a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 32L). "Red 7" symbol (eg, 15th on left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (eg, 11th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), "cherry" There are nine types of symbols (for example, the ninth of the left reel 32L), the "replay 3" symbol (for example, the sixth of the left reel 32L), and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 3, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 4 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels can be visually recognized as the entire symbol. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized via the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of medals bet, and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of paying out the medals, the replay Either the benefit of the above or the benefit of the transition of the gaming state is given.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a bending line, not as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Sub-line SL2 connecting the connected sub-line SL2, the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the middle design of the right reel 32R, and the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. Sub-line SL4 connecting the lower symbols, sub-line SL5 connecting the lower symbols on the left reel 32L, middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and upper symbols on the right reel 32R, etc. Even if the combination is established, the prize is not established. The main line ML is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. In such a configuration in which a plurality of main line MLs are set, the number of bets is increased. The number of mainline MLs to be activated may differ depending on the configuration. Further, the main line ML is not limited to a bent line, and may be a line extending in a straight line.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won, and FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (j) are each prize. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the stop symbol at the time of occurrence.

The small winning combination prizes for which medals are paid out include the 1st to 12th supplementary prizes, the 1st bell prize, the 2nd bell prize, the 1st watermelon prize, and the 2nd watermelon prize.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is. It is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol. If it is, it will be one of the 1st supplementary prize to the 9th supplementary prize. In addition, if the "Red 7" symbol, "Bell" symbol, and "Bell" symbol stop from the left on the main line ML, the 10th supplementary prize will be awarded, and the "BAR" symbol, "Bell" symbol from the left on the main line ML. And, when the "bell" symbol is stopped, the 11th supplementary prize is awarded, and when the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol are stopped from the left in the main line ML, the 12th supplementary prize is awarded. If any of the 1st supplementary prize to the 12th supplementary prize is awarded, one medal will be paid out.

On the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, or the "replay 3" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first bell is won. If the first bell is won, four medals will be paid out.

In the case of winning the first bell, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 are “bell” symbols. The player can easily recognize that the winning is established when the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on a straight line. In this case, by stopping and displaying the same combination of "bell" symbols at the time of winning the first bell, it is easy for the player to recognize the occurrence of the winning in the configuration aimed at diversifying the winning formation mode in the main line ML. It becomes possible.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "cherry" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. If either is the case, the second bell will be won. If the second bell is won, nine medals will be paid out.

In the case of winning the second bell, as shown in FIG. 6B, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "bell" symbols in the sub-line SL5 rising to the right. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. Further, the line in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell is won is the sub line SL5, which is different from the sub line SL4 in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon wins. If the first watermelon wins, four medals will be paid out.

In the case of winning the first watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6C, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the downward-sloping subline SL1 can be "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of "watermelon" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the "cherry" symbol passes through the upper, middle or lower row, the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1 when the first watermelon is won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "BAR" symbol or the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "". If it is a "watermelon" symbol, it will be the second watermelon prize. If the second watermelon wins, four medals will be paid out.

In the case of winning the second watermelon, as shown in FIG. 6D, the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 are all "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon has been won. Further, the line where the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second watermelon is won is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 where the combination of the "watermelon" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first watermelon is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning.

Normal replay prize, bell replay prize, first cherry replay prize, second cherry replay prize are given as prizes that can be played in the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals). There are prizes, 1st special replay prize, 2nd special replay prize, 1st RT replay prize, 2nd RT replay prize, 1st special replay prize, 2nd special replay prize, 1st fall replay prize and 2nd fall replay prize.

Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is. If it is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol, and "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "White 7" symbol or the "Watermelon" symbol, the normal replay prize is won. Will be.

In the case of a normal replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (e), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle subline SL3 are the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, and the "replay 3". It will be one of the symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the normal replay prize has been won.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol. If the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, a bell replay prize is awarded.

In the case of a bell replay prize, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the Bell Replay prize has been won. In addition, the line where the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when winning the bell replay is subline SL2, and the subline SL4 where the combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when winning the first bell and "bell" when winning the second bell. It is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish the bell replay winning from the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol and the "cherry" symbol. And if it is one of the "watermelon" symbols, it will be the first cherry replay prize.

In the case of the first cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (g), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the downward-sloping subline SL1 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay prize is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 attempts to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each stop button 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "cherry" symbol, two "cherry" symbols or three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL1. Can be displayed.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is either the "replay 1" symbol, the "replay 2" symbol, or the "replay 3" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay prize is awarded.

In the case of the second cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (h), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper subline SL2 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the second cherry replay prize is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "cherry" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each stop button 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "cherry" symbol, two "cherry" symbols or three "cherry" symbols are stopped in the subline SL2. Can be displayed. Further, the line in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second cherry replay prize is won is the sub line SL2, which is different from the sub line SL1 in which the combination of the "cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first cherry replay prize is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible for the player to distinguish between the first cherry replay winning and the second cherry replay winning.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "white 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, or the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the right reel. If the stop symbol of 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, it will be the first special replay prize.

In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (i), all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower subline SL4 can be "red 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "Red 7" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational effect can be performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "Red 7" symbol, three "Red 7" symbols may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL4.

On the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, the second special replay prize is awarded. In the case of the second special replay winning, the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 1" symbol. If it is either a "2" symbol or a "replay 3" symbol, it will be the first RT replay prize. Here, since the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary with respect to whether or not the first RT replay wins, for example, the first "replay 1" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML on the left reel 32L. At the same time, when the first "Replay 3" symbol on the right reel 32R is stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and the fourth "White 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M is stopped and displayed on the upper row, "White 7" is displayed. The combination of symbols will be stopped and displayed in a straight line. Therefore, in the case of the first RT replay winning, in the reel control process described later, the stop control of the middle reel 32M is performed so that the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line do not become the same symbol occurs. ..

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "white 7" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "". If it is any of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol, the second RT replay prize is awarded. In the case of the second RT replay winning, the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay prize is awarded. The stop symbol of the left reel 32L is arbitrary with respect to whether or not the first special replay wins.

In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "white 7" symbols in each of the downward-sloping subline SL1 and the upward-sloping subline SL5, respectively. Can be. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay prize has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "white 7" symbols may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line. When the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the image display device 66 provided on the front door 12 tries to stop and display the "white 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as a chance notification. A motivational production is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping and operating each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in an attempt to stop and display the "white 7" symbol, three "white 7" symbols may be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 1" symbol. If it is either the "2" symbol or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is either the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, or the "watermelon" symbol, the second special replay prize is awarded. Become. In the case of the second special replay winning, the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

On the mainline ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, or the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the right. If the stop symbol of the reel 32R is either a "cherry" symbol or a "watermelon" symbol, the first fall replay prize is awarded. In the case of the first fall replay winning, the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay 1" symbol, "replay 2". If it is either a symbol or a "replay 3" symbol, it will be the second fall replay prize. In the case of the second fall replay winning, the event that all three symbols stopped and displayed on a straight line are the same symbol does not occur.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, it is possible to play the next game while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the game of the next game can be started in the state of three bets while eliminating the need for bets on both medals and virtual medals. It will be possible.

In addition, among the above-mentioned various replay prizes, the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, the first fall replay prize and the first 2 The fall replay prize not only triggers the granting of the replay prize privilege, but also triggers the transition of the gaming state. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning combination lottery process, and the transition between these gaming states is the transition of the gaming states. Occurs when a trigger replay prize is established. The contents of each gaming state and the conditions for transition to each gaming state will be described in detail later.

<Device for executing various notifications and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 64 and a speaker 65 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 66 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 64 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 64 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66. The speakers 65 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 65 is sound output controlled so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 66 is performed.

The image display device 66 has a display surface, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 66 is displayed and controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main board is housed in a board box. When opening the board box, it is necessary to release the fastened state, and a broken portion will occur when the fastened state is released. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to simply confirm whether or not the board box has been opened.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub control device 80 in addition to the main control device 70. The sub control device 80 is arranged on the front door 12 so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 66. The sub control device 80 controls the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the sub control device 80, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 70.

<Electrical configuration of slot machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there are a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has rotated once), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, and each. Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and credit insertion buttons 47, 48, 49. Credit input detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of, the payment detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the payment button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, and the reset detection sensor 56a that detects the operation of the reset button 56. , Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 57a for detecting that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

A reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a sub control device 80, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72, and when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out, the drive control of the hopper device 53 is the MPU 72. Is done by. Further, a command is transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub control device 80 at each timing of each game.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The sub control device 80 includes a sub control board 81 for executing various notifications and execution control of various effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub control board 81. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in.

It is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be individually chipped. Further, in the situation where the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the RAM 84 is supplied with the backup power from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54, and the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). And 2 days), the data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 84 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and various commands are received from the MPU 72.

An upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, and an image display device 66 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The MPU 82 performs various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 64, sound output control of the speaker 65, and display control of the image display device 66 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. To be done.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as a main side MPU 72, a main side ROM 73, and a main side RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the sub control device 80 are referred to as sub sides, respectively. It is referred to as MPU 82, sub-side ROM 83 and sub-side RAM 84.

<Processes executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of the basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

The processing of the main MPU 72 is roughly divided into a normal processing that is repeatedly executed after the main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started by interrupting the normal processing periodically. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then the normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process (step S101), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed. In step S104, a process of clearing the watchdog timer that initializes the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S106, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the sub-control device 80 is performed. In step S111, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. After that, in step S113, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S201), and then a start wait process is executed (step S202). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay prizes has occurred, the automatic insertion process of automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If none of the replay prizes have occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 is operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Process the medal return. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on the medal has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step S203), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number. The process returns to the start waiting process (step S202). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S204).

If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S202). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 after activating the main line ML (step S205). After that, a lottery process for drawing a winning combination in this game is executed (step S206), and "1" is set in the continuation chance flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S207:). YES), the continuation chance process for controlling the continuation chance period is executed (step S208), and the condition is that "1" is not set in the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 (step S207: NO). ), Reel control processing for driving and controlling each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in an manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery processing (step S206) is executed (step S209).

After that, the medal payout process is executed (step S210). In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is given, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If so, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that a number of medals exceeding the maximum value are paid out to the medal tray 59.

After that, the bonus RT management process for controlling the bonus RT state was executed (step S211), and the external output setting process for externally outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer provided in the game hall was executed. Later (step S212), the process returns to the process of step S201.

<Lottery process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process of step S206 in the normal process (FIG. 9).

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S301). In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S302). Here, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. It should be noted that "setting n + 1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". Further, as the lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the set values at the same stage are set, the normal mode, the first RT mode, the second RT mode, the additional RT mode, and the bonus RT mode are four. There are types. In step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current lottery mode is selected.

The lottery table will be described by taking as an example a lottery table for a normal mode selected in the case of "setting 3" and the normal mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal mode. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 12 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 11, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, in IV = 1, the second bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any one of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize may occur.

In this slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is configured in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, it may happen that the constituent symbols do not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). say). The 1st to 12th supplementary prizes, the 1st to 2nd watermelon prizes, the 1st special replay prize, and the 1st special replay prize are prize modes in which the omission may occur.

In IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 11, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize and the ninth supplementary prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur.

In IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 11, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

In IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 11, the second bell winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the seventh supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, any of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize and the seventh supplementary prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third supplementary prize, the fifth supplementary prize, and the seventh supplementary prize will occur.

At IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 11, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the third supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the fifth supplementary winning data, and the eighth The supplementary winning data and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any one of the 1st supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 8th supplementary prize and the 9th supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, none of the 1st supplementary prize, the 3rd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 5th supplementary prize, the 8th supplementary prize and the 9th supplementary prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this omission will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

At IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 11, the first bell winning data, the first supplementary winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, the sixth supplementary winning data, and the eighth The supplementary winning data and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. When winning at IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In other cases, any one of the 1st supplementary prize, the 2nd supplementary prize, the 4th supplementary prize, the 6th supplementary prize, the 8th supplementary prize and the 9th supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, none of the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the fourth supplementary prize, the sixth supplementary prize, the eighth supplementary prize, and the ninth supplementary prize will occur. there is a possibility. The probability that this omission will occur is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

At IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 11, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplementary winning data, the eleventh supplementary winning data, and the twelfth supplementary winning data are set. ing. When winning at IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first watermelon winning or the second watermelon winning can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning may occur. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any one of the 10th supplementary prize, the 11th supplementary prize, and the 12th supplementary prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the 10th supplementary prize, the 11th supplementary prize, and the 12th supplementary prize may occur.

At IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 11, bell replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 12, the bell replay prize is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

At IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 11, the first cherry replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 12, the first cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. ..

At IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 11, the second cherry replay winning data is set. When winning at IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 12, the second cherry replay winning is surely generated regardless of the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. ..

In IV = 11 to 14, as shown in FIG. 11, normal replay winning data, first special replay winning data, and second special replay winning data are set. In this case, when winning at IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In addition, either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize will be the normal replay prize of each stop button 42 to 44. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing. If the player wins at IV = 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 2 Any of the special replay prizes will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. If the player wins at IV = 13, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 2 Any of the special replay prizes will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. If the winner is IV = 14, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 2 Any of the special replay prizes will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize will surely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIG. 11, the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set in IV = 15 to 18. In this case, when winning at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 12, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In addition, the first RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the first RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the lottery table for the normal mode of FIG. 11 is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, IV = 4. The probability of winning at the time of is about 1 / 9.3, and the probability of winning at IV = 5 and the probability of winning at IV = 6 are about 1 / 12.9, respectively. The probability of winning when IV = 7 is about 1 / 66.8, the probability of winning when IV = 8 is about 1/122, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 is. The probability is about 1/212, the probability of winning when IV = 10 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when IV = 11, the probability of winning when IV = 12, IV. The probability of winning when = 13 and the probability of winning when IV = 14 are approximately 1 / 91.7, respectively, and the probability of winning when IV = 15 and winning when IV = 16 respectively. The probability of winning, the probability of winning when IV = 17, and the probability of winning when IV = 18 are each about 1 / 40.3.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 10), after selecting the lottery table (step S302), the index value IV is set to 1 (step S303), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set (step). S304). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV “1” is added to this random number value. A new determination value DV is used.

After that, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate (step S305). In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S306). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the index value IV this time in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 74. The state in which the winning data is set is cleared to "0" after the end of this game regardless of whether or not the winning is established corresponding to the winning data.

When the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 (step S305: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is added by 1 (step S307), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S305, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S306 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S308, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, the lottery result command is set (step S309). The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the winning / failing determination of the winning combination. In addition, the lottery result command includes data indicating whether the lottery mode of the current combination in the main MPU 72 is a normal mode, a first RT mode, a second RT mode, an additional RT mode, or a bonus RT mode. After that, the first stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control is executed (step S310), and the process for starting the continuation chance period for starting the continuation chance period is executed (step S311). The stop information first setting process and the process for starting the continuation chance period will be described later.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control process of step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 9) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S401). In the rotation start processing, a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 10) in the previous game is started. Check if it has been done, and if it has not passed, wait until the wait time has elapsed. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the motor control initialization process for setting the rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44. Notify the player etc. of that.

Following the rotation start process, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S402). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, it waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the rotating reel and the corresponding stop button have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S403). .. If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S402 and waits until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set (step S404).

The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub control device 80 so as to know which stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S405 to S411 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position (lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S405). Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S406).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reel to be stopped after sliding one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, as well as stopping modes. Therefore, in step S406, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S407). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S408), and if they are equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed. (Step S409). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S410). If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S411), and the process returns to step S402.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10), and by using the stop information, each It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbols that have reached the base point position when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped. As the stop information, the slip number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S310 of the lottery process (FIG. 10) and the stop information executed in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 13). There is a second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the lottery process result. For example, if IV = 1 to 7 or 11 to 18 in the normal mode is won, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the stop order and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 12 is set. In addition, if the situation is that the winner is one of IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode, the stop order that enables the establishment of either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is the first. 1 Prioritize the establishment of the special replay prize over the establishment of the second special replay prize, and set the stop information for establishing the second special replay prize when the establishment of the first special replay prize is not possible.

The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop rolls of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do. For example, in the situation where the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 7 and 11 to 18 in the normal mode, the set winning data and the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command are used. , It is a situation in which it is impossible to establish the first special replay prize in the stop order that enables the establishment of either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize based on the stop result. If it is specified, the information will be changed to the stop information for establishing the second special replay prize.

If it is determined in step S410 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S412. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a winning determination process. In the winning determination process, first, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the left reel 32L, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the middle reel 32M, and the main line ML on the right reel 32R. The type of the stopped symbol and the type are grasped (step S501 to step S503). When grasping the type of the symbol, the 2-byte data set for each type of the symbol is read from the main ROM 73. Then, as a logical operation process of the symbol combination, the 2-byte data corresponding to the symbol combination is derived by AND processing each 2-byte data grasped in steps S501 to S503 with bits in the same order (bits in the same order). Step S504).

After that, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in step S504 corresponds to any of the winning data (step S505). If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the winning process is executed (step S506). In the winning processing, it is determined whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning generated this time is set, and if the winning data is not set, an abnormal command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80. By receiving the abnormality command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes an abnormality notification corresponding to the illegal winning by the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. If the winning data is set, the number of medals to be paid out is the number of medals to be paid out so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process if the winning is a small winning combination. Set it on the counter. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S202 in the normal process (FIG. 9), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets as the current bet number is executed.

Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 13), after the winning determination process is executed, the winning result command is set as an output target to the sub control device 80 in step S413. The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included. In addition, the winning result command also includes data corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process executed at the start of this game, and the winning combination lottery mode at the start of this game is the normal mode and the first RT mode. , Second RT mode, additional RT mode, and bonus RT mode are included. After that, the lottery mode transition process for changing the lottery mode in the main MPU 72 according to the current winning result is executed (step S414). The content of the transition process of the lottery mode will be described in detail later.

<Contents of lottery mode and transition mode of lottery mode>
Next, the contents of the lottery mode in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the combination of the main MPU 72 and the transition mode of the lottery mode will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the lottery mode and the transition mode of the lottery mode. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode selected in the case of “setting 3” and the first RT mode ST2, and FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for reels 32L, 32M in the first RT mode ST2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of 32R and the winning mode to be established, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the 2nd RT mode ST3 and the winning mode established, and FIG. 20 is "setting 3". It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the bonus RT mode selected in the case of the bonus RT mode ST5, and FIG. 21 shows the stop order and establishment of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the bonus RT mode ST5. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the winning mode.

As a lottery mode, as shown in FIG. 15, a normal mode ST1, a first RT mode ST2, a second RT mode ST3, an additional RT mode ST4, and a bonus RT mode ST5 are set. In the lottery tables of each lottery mode ST1 to ST5, the types of winning combinations that enable the payout of medals and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are the same. Specifically, as already explained, in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11), the winning combination that enables the payout of medals is set to IV = 1 to 7, but it is set to IV = 1 to 7. As shown in FIGS. 16, 18 and 20, the types of medals and the PV values set to IV = 1 to 7 are the lottery table for the first RT mode, the lottery table for the second RT mode, and the lottery for the bonus RT mode. The same is true for the table. Although not shown, this is the same in the additional RT mode ST4. As a result, in each lottery mode ST1 to ST5, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of the winning combination that enables the payout of medals (hereinafter, also referred to as the payout occurrence probability) is the same, and specifically, about It is 1 / 1.7.

Here, in the slot machine 10, control for AT can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82. The control for AT means that when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined correct answer order, a combination of symbols corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is established on the main line ML, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out. In the situation where the lottery winning combination is won, it is a control for notifying the stop order which is the correct answer order. The lottery winning combination corresponding to the stop order can be won with a relatively high probability in both the case where the control for AT is executed and the case where the control for AT is not executed, but the order is correct when the control for AT is not executed. While the stop order is not notified, the stop order that is the correct answer order is notified when the AT control is executed, so the AT control is not executed when the AT control is executed. The number of medals paid out per unit game number will increase more than the state (hereinafter, also referred to as non-AT state).

Specifically, as the lottery winning combination corresponding to the stop order, there are a winning combination corresponding to the first bell winning and a winning combination corresponding to the second bell winning combination. Then, in any of the lottery modes, in the state where the control for the first AT is executed as the control for the AT in the sub-side MPU 82 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first AT state), IV = 1 to 6 If the winning is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell winning is notified.

Even if you win in any of IV = 1 to 6, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell prize is not notified, the first bell prize will be 1/3. It is necessary to answer correctly to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is necessary to answer correctly to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is 1/6 for the second bell winning. Further, the stop order for establishing the first bell prize and the stop order for establishing the second bell prize are both the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, and the sub-side MPU82. If the left reel 32L is not first stopped in the situation where the control for AT is not executed, a penalty event will occur as described later. Then, when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, it is unlikely that the bell prize will be established even if the winner is one of IV = 1 to 6, and basically the medal is paid out. A supplementary prize will be established in which the prize is not established or the number of medals paid out is one. This number is less than the specified number of bets of three.

On the other hand, when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the first AT state, if any of IV = 1 to 6 is won as described above, the stop order for establishing the corresponding bell winning is notified. Then, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, the first bell winning or the second bell winning will be established. The number of medals paid out when the first bell prize is established is nine, and the number of medals paid out when the second bell prize is established is four. These numbers are larger than the specified number of bets of three. As a result, the number of medals paid out per unit game number increases when the sub-side MPU 82 is in the first AT state than when it is in the non-AT state.

By the way, in the state where the control for AT is executed in the sub side MPU 82, when the winner is won at IV = 1 or 2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the corresponding bell winning is Although it is notified, the second AT state is set in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the bell winning is not notified when the winning is achieved in any of IV = 3 to 6. In the 2nd AT state, the number of medals paid out per unit game is smaller than in the 1st AT state, but even if the player wins at IV = 1-2, the stop order for establishing the bell prize is established. Compared to the non-AT state in which is not notified, the number of medals paid out per unit game number will increase.

The winning probability of the winning combination that enables the replay winning in each lottery mode (hereinafter, also referred to as the replay probability) is about 1 / 6.3 in the normal mode ST1, whereas the first RT mode ST2 and the second RT mode Each of ST3, additional RT mode ST4, and bonus RT mode ST5 is about 1 / 2.5. That is, even if the set values are the same, the replay probability is set in a plurality of stages. As a result, it is possible to change the replay probability with the change of the lottery mode, and it is possible to generate a relatively advantageous state and a disadvantageous state for the player by using the change of the replay probability. ..

The first RT mode ST2, the second RT mode ST3, the additional RT mode ST4, and the bonus RT mode ST5 have the same replay probability and payout occurrence probability as described above, but the second RT mode ST3 and the bonus RT mode ST5 are the second in the sub-side MPU 82. The mode is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the 1AT state, whereas the first RT mode ST2 and the additional RT mode ST4 do not trigger the transition to the 1AT state.

When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 becomes the bonus RT mode ST5 in the situation where the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied, the control state of the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes the bonus state. .. In the bonus state, one execution is completed when the number of games won by any of IV = 1 to 6 reaches the end reference game number (for example, 20 games). Further, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the bonus state, a new execution time is started after the end of one execution time in the bonus state. In addition, in the bonus state, the transitionable condition to the ART state, which will be described later, may be satisfied, and if the transitionable condition is satisfied, an opportunity to shift to the ART state will occur after the end of the bonus state. ..

When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 becomes the second RT mode ST3 in the situation where the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the control state of the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes the ART state. .. In the ART state, one execution is completed when the number of continuous games reaches the end reference number of games. Further, in the ART state, the addition condition may be satisfied, and if the addition condition is satisfied, the number of continuous games remaining in the ART state will increase.

When the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the additional RT mode ST4 in the ART state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the additional RT mode ST4 and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the first AT state. Will migrate. The added state ends when the number of continuous games in the added state reaches the end reference game number, and returns to the ART state. In the additional state, the probability that the additional condition is satisfied is higher than in the case of the ART state, and if the additional condition is satisfied, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state that returns after the end of the additional state increases. ..

In the configuration where the transition of the gaming state can occur in relation to the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 as described above, the first RT mode ST2 is promoted from the normal mode ST1 and the second RT mode ST3 is promoted from the first RT mode ST2. Then, the additional RT mode ST4 is promoted from the second RT mode ST3. Further, the bonus RT mode ST5 is promoted from any of the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, and the second RT mode ST3.

On the other hand, only the fall to the second RT mode ST3 occurs from the additional RT mode ST4, only the fall to the first RT mode ST2 occurs from the second RT mode ST3, and the fall to the normal mode ST1 from the first RT mode ST2 occurs. Only occur. Further, only the fall from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 occurs.

The transition of these lottery modes occurs when the replay prize corresponding to the promotion or the replay prize corresponding to the fall is established. Hereinafter, these replay prizes will be described in detail.

<Aspects of promotion and fall regarding the relationship with the bonus status>
As shown in FIGS. 11, 16 and 18, the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode and the lottery table for the second RT mode have IV = 11 to 14 as winning data other than the normal replay winning data. The first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set in. The probability of winning any of IV = 11 to 14 is the same in the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, and the second RT mode ST3. Specifically, the winning probability is about 1 / 22.9. Further, when winning in any of IV = 11 to 14, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order as already explained with reference to the lottery table for normal mode, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established (see FIGS. 12, 17, and 19). When the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5.

If you win at any of IV = 11-14 in the situation where the conditions for transition to the bonus state are satisfied, the reel 32L for establishing either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize , 32M, 32R stop order is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, if the conditions for transition to the bonus state are satisfied, either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is won by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stop order. It becomes possible to establish. Then, in the situation where the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied, either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5, which has already been described. As you can see, the game state shifts to the bonus state.

In addition, when the winning condition is satisfied in the situation where the transition to the bonus state is satisfied, if the player wins in any of IV = 11 to 14, not only the notification of the stop order described above but also "red" in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. 7 ”A motivational effect is executed to stop and display the symbol. Then, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at the timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the subline SL4, the second operation is performed. 2 Stop control is executed so that the establishment of the first special replay prize is prioritized over the special replay prize. This makes it possible to create an opportunity for the three "Red 7" symbols to be stopped and displayed in a straight line when shifting to the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 20, the lottery table for the bonus RT mode is set with the same winning data as the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 11) at IV = 7 to 10. Further, each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10 is the same as the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). If you win in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode lottery table in the bonus state, the number of times you win in any of the bonus state execution times (IV = 1 to 6) is the end criterion. There is an opportunity to increase the number of executions (1 execution is the number of times until the number of games is reached), and an opportunity to increase the number of executions in the ART state (1 execution is the number of continuous games until the number of continuous games reaches the end reference game). do.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the lottery table for the bonus RT mode, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data at IV = 11 to 16, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 11 to 16 is about 1 / 2.6.

When winning at IV = 11 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It will definitely occur. If the player wins at IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1.

If the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first AT state and the gaming state is the bonus state, even if the player wins in any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode ST5, the normal replay prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. As a result, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the notified stop order, the establishment of the first fall replay winning is avoided, and even if the winning is achieved in any of IV = 11 to 16, the lottery mode is set. It is possible to prevent the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

Here, even in a situation where the condition for transition to the bonus state is not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, the normal mode ST1, the first RT mode ST2, or the second RT mode ST3 is used. If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in any of IV = 11 to 14 and the corresponding stop order, either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established and the lottery mode is established. Will shift to the bonus RT mode ST5. In this case, since the winning combination lottery process is executed in the mode corresponding to the bonus RT mode ST5 in the main MPU 72, the replay probability is higher than in the situation in the normal mode ST1. However, since the control of the first AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the notification of the stop order for establishing the bell winning is not executed even if the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6. Further, even if the player wins at any of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for the bonus RT mode, the stop order for establishing the normal replay prize is not notified. Then, in the situation where the stop order is not notified, the probability of the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning is 5/6. Then, the first fall replay winning will be established with a high probability, and the lottery mode will shift to the normal mode ST1. As a result, even if the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs even though the transition to the bonus state is not satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to receive the profit.

When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where the sub-side MPU 82 is neither in the first AT state nor the second AT state and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. , The player is disadvantaged as the occurrence of a penalty event. Then, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified by the image display device 66 in neither the bonus state nor the ART state, the player is set as the first stop unless an operation error is made. It is considered that the left reel 32L is stopped. On the other hand, in the stop order for establishing either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize, the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L as the first stop is not set. This reduces the possibility that the lottery mode will shift to the bonus RT mode ST5 when the conditions for shifting to the bonus state are not satisfied.

If you win in any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus state and the bonus RT mode ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning. However, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order due to an operation error or the like, the lottery mode shifts from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1. Become. However, even in this case, the first AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 is maintained and the gaming state is also maintained in the bonus state. That is, the replay probability is reduced to the probability corresponding to the normal mode ST1, but if the player wins in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the bell prize is notified. Will be. If the player wins in any of IV = 11 to 14 in the bonus state and the normal mode ST1, the stop order for establishing either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is Be notified. Then, when either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established, the bonus state is restored to the bonus RT mode ST5. However, in this case, the effect that motivates the "white 7" symbol to be stopped and displayed is not executed.

<Modes of promotion and fall regarding the relationship with the ART state>
As already described, in the lottery table for the normal mode, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data at IV = 15 to 18 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 11). The probability of winning any of these IV = 15-18 is about 1 / 10.1. Then, when winning in any of IV = 15 to 18, as shown in FIG. 12, the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R was won. When the stop order corresponding to the winning combination is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode ST1 to the first RT mode ST2.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as the winning data at IV = 15 to 18, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 15-18 is about 1 / 10.1. When winning at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 17, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT. The replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 16, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 17, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the second RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 18, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second RT replay winning is each stop. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In the 1st RT mode ST2, any of IV = 15 to 18 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. In that case, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3.

If the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, and if any of IV = 15 to 18 is won in the normal mode ST1, the stop order for establishing the first RT replay winning is the image display device 66. Will be notified at. In addition, if the conditions for transition to the ART state are satisfied, and if the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode ST2, the stop order for establishing the second RT replay prize is an image. Notified by the display device 66. As a result, when the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped according to the notified stop order, and the first RT replay winning can be established. , It becomes possible to establish the second RT replay prize. Then, in the situation where the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, so that the gaming state shifts to the ART state as described above.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set as the winning data at IV = 15, in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning this IV = 15 is about 1/3280. When the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode is won at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 19, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize is won. It is established, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is established.

If the player wins at IV = 15 in the ART state and the second RT mode ST3, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning are stopped. The order is notified by the image display device 66. As a result, in the ART state and the second RT mode ST3, either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is won by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stop order. Can be established. Then, in the ART state, either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts to the additional RT mode ST4, so that the gaming state shifts to the additional state.

Further, when the winning is achieved at IV = 15 in the ART state and the second RT mode ST3, not only the notification of the stop order described above but also the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A motivational production is performed to make it. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at the timing when the "white 7" symbol can be stopped only on the subline SL1 or both the subline SL1 and the subline SL5. When the stop operation is performed, in the reel control process (FIG. 13), the stop control is executed so that the establishment of the first special replay winning is prioritized over the second special replay winning. This makes it possible to create an opportunity for the three "white 7" symbols to be stopped and displayed in a straight line at the time of transition to the additional state.

In the additional RT mode lottery table, although not shown, the same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set at IV = 1 to 10. In this case, each winning probability of IV = 1 to 7 is the same as in the case of the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). On the other hand, each winning probability of IV = 8 to 10 is set higher than the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). Specifically, in the additional RT mode ST4, only IV = 8 to 10 can win a replay prize, and the probability of winning in any of IV = 8 to 10 is set to about 1 / 2.5. ing. As a result, in the additional RT mode ST4, the probability that the bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, and the second cherry replay prize will be established increases. Then, if any of the bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, and the second cherry replay prize is established in the additional state and the additional RT mode ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is added. Will be done.

Incidentally, the winning probability of IV = 8 to 10 is set so that the winning probability becomes lower in the order of IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10. In this case, the number of continuous games to be selected is more or more likely to be added when the winning combination with a low winning probability is won than when the winning combination with a high winning probability is won.

As described above, the added state ends when the number of continuous games in the added state becomes the end reference game number, and returns to the ART state. In this case, the lottery mode shifts from the additional RT mode ST4 to the second RT mode ST3. Further, the transition from the additional RT mode ST4 to a mode different from the second RT mode ST3 does not occur. Therefore, the additional RT mode lottery table does not have a role for shifting the lottery mode. That is, only the above-mentioned IV = 1 to 10 combinations are set in the addition mode lottery table, and other combinations are not set.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the second RT mode lottery table, the same winning data as in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set at IV = 7 to 10. Further, each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10 is the same as the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). If any of IV = 7 to 10 in the lottery table for the second RT mode is won in the ART state, an opportunity to add the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state occurs. The same winning data as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is set for IV = 7 to 10, and each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10 corresponds to the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). The point that it is the same as the winning probability of the IV value is the same for the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16).

As shown in FIG. 18, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as the winning data at IV = 16 to 21, the second falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 16 to 21 is about 1/197.

When winning at IV = 16 in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize is generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It will definitely occur. If the player wins at IV = 17, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 18, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 19, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 20, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 21, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

If the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first AT state and the gaming state is the ART state, even if the player wins in any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode ST3, the normal replay prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. As a result, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the notified stop order, the establishment of the second fall replay winning is avoided, and even if the winning is achieved in any of IV = 16 to 21, the lottery mode is set. It is possible to prevent the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST1.

Here, even if the condition for transition to the ART state is not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode ST1. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order, the first RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2. Further, even if the condition for transition to the ART state is not satisfied and the stop order is not notified by the image display device 66, the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode ST2. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding stop order, the second RT replay winning is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3. In this case, since the lottery process of the winning combination is executed in the mode corresponding to the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3 in the main MPU 72, the replay probability is higher than the situation in the normal mode ST1. However, since the control of the first AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the notification of the stop order for establishing the bell winning is not executed even if the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6. Further, even if any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode is won, the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is not notified, and IV = in the lottery table for the first RT mode. Even if one of 19 to 24 is won, the stop order for establishing the normal replay prize is not notified. Then, in the situation where these stop orders are not notified, the probability of the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize or the second fall replay prize is 5/6. Then, the first fall replay winning and the second falling replay winning will be established with high probability, and the lottery mode will shift to the normal mode ST1. As a result, even if the transition to the second RT mode ST3 occurs even though the condition for transition to the ART state is not satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to receive the profit.

As described above, the middle reel 32M or the right reel is set as the first stop in the situation where the sub-side MPU 82 is neither in the first AT state nor the second AT state and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. If the 32R is stopped, the player is disadvantaged as a penalty event occurs. Then, in a situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified by the image display device 66 in neither the bonus state nor the ART state, the player is set as the first stop unless an operation error is made. It is considered that the left reel 32L is stopped. On the other hand, the stop order for establishing the first RT replay prize and the stop order for establishing the second RT replay prize do not set the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L as the first stop. As a result, the possibility that the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2 and the second RT mode ST3 under the situation where the condition for shifting to the ART state is not satisfied is reduced. In particular, in order to shift to the second RT mode ST3, it is not enough to establish the first RT replay prize in the normal mode ST1, but it is necessary to establish the second RT replay prize in the first RT mode ST2. In this respect, it is possible to reduce the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in a situation where the condition for shifting to the ART state is not satisfied.

When one execution time in the ART state is completed, even if the remaining execution time in the ART state is one or more times, when winning in any of IV = 16 to 21 in the situation of the second RT mode ST3. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not notified. In this case, the second fall replay winning is established with a high probability, and when the second falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as the winning data at IV = 19 to 24, the first falling replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these IV = 19 to 24 is about 1 / 10.9.

When winning at IV = 19 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 17, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel. In the case of 32R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. It will definitely occur. If the player wins at IV = 20, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 21, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 22, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the player wins at IV = 23, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If the winner is IV = 24, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. It surely occurs regardless of the operation timing of 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1 as described above.

If one execution in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution times in the ART state are 0, when the player wins in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning is not notified. In this case, the first fall replay winning is established with a high probability, and when the first falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1. As a result, the gaming state returns to the normal gaming state.

On the other hand, if one execution time in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution time in the ART state is one or more times, the player wins in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. At that time, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. Further, if one execution time in the ART state is completed and the remaining execution time in the ART state is one or more times, the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the situation of the first RT mode ST2. At that time, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second RT replay winning is notified. Then, when the second RT replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, and a new execution round of the ART state is started.

That is, when one execution time in the ART state ends in a situation where the remaining execution time in the ART state is one or more times, a new execution time in the ART state is not immediately started, but the second RT mode. When the lottery mode transition of ST3 → 1st RT mode ST2 → 2nd RT mode ST3 occurs, a new execution time of the ART state is started. As a result, it is possible to generate a period of continuation over a predetermined number of games between one execution time of the ART state and the next execution time, and a new execution time of the ART state is started in the period. Can be expected from the player.

Further, even if one execution time in the ART state is completed in the situation where the remaining execution time in the ART state is one or more times as described above, the lottery mode is temporarily dropped to the first RT mode ST2, and then the first execution time is performed. By configuring the configuration to start a new execution time of the ART state when promotion to the 2RT mode ST3 occurs, it is possible to start a new execution time of the ART state triggered by the transition to the 2nd RT mode ST3. Will be. Although the details will be described later, the start and end of the ART state will be managed not by the main MPU 72 but by the sub MPU 82. By starting a new execution time, it is possible to indirectly grasp the timing at which a new execution time in the ART state is started in the main MPU 72.

Here, in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16), a combination in which only the normal replay winning data is set at IV = 25 is set. The probability of winning at IV = 25 is set higher than the probability of winning another role, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.6. If the player wins at IV = 25, the normal replay prize will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18), a combination in which only the normal replay winning data is set at IV = 22 is set. The probability of winning at IV = 22 is set higher than the probability of winning another role, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1 / 6.3. If the player wins at IV = 22, the normal replay prize will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The details will be described later, but by utilizing the combination of IV = 25 in the first RT mode ST2 and the combination of IV = 22 in the second RT mode ST3, the transition to the normal mode ST1 is performed after one execution of the ART state is completed. Is generated, or in the period until the new execution time of the ART state is started, the effect for predicting that the new execution time of the ART state is started is executed.

By the way, as already explained, if the player wins in any of IV = 16 to 21 in the ART state and the second RT mode ST3, the reel 32L for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize. , 32M, 32R stop order is notified, and if the player wins in any of IV = 19 to 24 in the ART state and the first RT mode ST2, the first fall replay prize is established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoidance is notified, but when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order due to an operation error or the like, the second RT mode ST3 is used. The transition to the first RT mode ST2 or the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 will occur. However, even in this case, the first AT state in the sub-side MPU 82 is maintained and the gaming state is also maintained in the ART state. That is, even if the lottery mode is the first RT mode ST2, if any of IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order for establishing the bell prize is notified. Also, if the lottery mode is set to the normal mode ST1, the replay probability will decrease, but if you win in any of IV = 1 to 6, the stop order for establishing the bell prize will be. Be notified. If the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the ART state and the normal mode ST1, the stop order for establishing the first RT replay winning is notified, and in the ART state. If the player wins in any of IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode ST2, the stop order for establishing the second RT replay prize is notified. Then, when the second RT replay winning is established, the state returns to the ART state and the second RT mode ST3.

<Transition process of lottery mode>
The processing content for shifting the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 as described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the transition process of the lottery mode. The lottery mode transition process is executed in step S414 in the reel control process (FIG. 13).

First, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the bonus RT mode ST5 is satisfied (step S601). In a situation where any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is set, IV = 11 to 14 If either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize is established after winning, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 is satisfied.

When the condition for shifting to the bonus RT mode ST5 is satisfied, the lottery table for the bonus RT mode is read from the main ROM 73 as the process of changing the lottery table, and the read lottery table is used in the main RAM 74 at present. The area where the lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode of is read is overwritten (step S602). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5.

Further, when the transition condition to the bonus RT mode ST5 is satisfied (step S601: YES), the value of the bell establishment counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S603: YES). ), “1” is set in the bonus RT start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The bell establishment counter is a counter for specifying the bonus state and the end trigger of the bonus state by the main MPU 72, and a value of "20" corresponding to the establishment reference number is set at the start of the bonus state. Every time IV = 1 to 6 is won, 1 is subtracted. In addition, the bonus RT start flag indicates that the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 has occurred in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter is "0", that is, the management process of the bonus state is not executed in the main MPU 72. Is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72.

In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1 (step S605). In the situation where the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11) is set, if the player wins at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the first RT replay prize is established, the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1. Is determined.

When the promotion condition is satisfied in the normal mode ST1, the lottery table for the first RT mode is read from the main ROM 73 as the process of changing the lottery table, and the read lottery table is used in the main RAM 74 as the current lottery. The area where the lottery table corresponding to the mode is read is overwritten (step S606). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode ST2.

In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the promotion condition is satisfied in the first RT mode ST2 (step S607). In the situation where the lottery table for the 1st RT mode (FIG. 16) is set, if the player wins at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the 2nd RT replay prize is established, the promotion condition is satisfied in the 1st RT mode ST2. It is determined that it is.

When the promotion condition is satisfied in the first RT mode ST2, the lottery table for the second RT mode is read from the main ROM 73 as the process of changing the lottery table, and the read lottery table is used in the main RAM 74 at present. The area where the lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode is read is overwritten (step S608). As a result, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3. After changing the lottery table, "1" is set in the ART output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S609). The ART output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that an external output corresponding to the start of the second RT mode ST3 should be performed.

In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the promotion condition to the additional RT mode ST4 is satisfied (step S610). In the situation where the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode (FIG. 18) is set, if IV = 15 is won and either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize is established, the additional RT mode ST4 is entered. It is determined that the promotion condition of is satisfied.

When the promotion condition to the additional RT mode ST4 is satisfied, the additional RT mode lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 as the process of changing the lottery table, and the read lottery table is used in the main RAM 74 at present. The area where the lottery table corresponding to the lottery mode of is read is overwritten (step S611). As a result, the lottery mode is added and the mode shifts to the RT mode ST4.

In the lottery mode transition process, it is determined whether or not the fall condition is satisfied (step S612). In the situation where the lottery table for the 1st RT mode (FIG. 16) is set, if IV = 19 to 24 is won and the 1st fall replay prize is established, it is determined that the fall condition is satisfied. .. Further, in the situation where the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) is set, the fall condition is also satisfied when the winner is won by any of IV = 16 to 21 and the second fall replay prize is established. Is determined. Further, it is determined that the fall condition is satisfied even when the number of continuous games reaches the end reference game number (for example, 20 games) in the situation where the additional RT mode lottery table is set. In addition, in the situation where the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is set, the fall condition is also satisfied when the winner is won by any of IV = 11 to 16 and the first fall replay prize is established. Is determined.

When any of the fall conditions is satisfied, as a process of changing the lottery table, the lottery table of the migration destination is read from the main ROM 73, and the read lottery table is set to the current lottery mode in the main RAM 74. The area where the corresponding lottery table is read is overwritten (step S613). Specifically, when the fall condition is satisfied in the first RT mode ST2, the lottery table for the normal mode is read, and when the fall condition is satisfied in the second RT mode ST3, the lottery table for the first RT mode is read and added RT. When the fall condition is satisfied in the mode ST4, the lottery table for the second RT mode is read, and when the fall condition is satisfied in the bonus RT mode ST5, the lottery table for the normal mode is read. As a result, the mode shifts to the lottery mode of the fall destination.

<Periodic processing>
Next, a periodic process executed periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

In the periodic processing, when a new command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S701: YES), the command received this time is stored in the ring buffer provided in the sub RAM 84 (step S702). The ring buffer is a buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands, and the write pointer is updated and read each time the write processing of the command to the area indicated by the write pointer is executed and the write processing is executed. The read pointer is updated each time the read process of the command from the area indicated by the pointer is executed and the read process is executed. The read pointer is updated when the command is read in one process of the periodic process and the periodic process of the next process is started.

In the periodic processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT state counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is “0” (step S703). The AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the sub-side MPU 82 is in the AT state, and if it is in the AT state, specifying the stay mode in the AT state. In the non-AT state, the value of the AT state counter is "0", and in the AT state, the value of the AT state counter is 1 or more.

When the value of the AT state counter is "0" (step S703: YES), the non-AT in-process for controlling the execution of the non-AT state is executed (step S704). On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter is 1 or more (step S703: NO), the AT in-process for controlling the execution of the AT state (first AT state or second AT state) is executed (step S705).

When the process of step S704 is executed, or when the process of step S705 is executed, the effect data setting process is executed in step S706. In the effect data setting process, the upper lamp 64 and the speaker perform an effect according to the lottery result or a winning result of the winning combination in each game, an effect indicating the expected degree of transition of the AT state, and an effect according to the progress of the AT state. The process for making the 65 and the image display device 66 perform is executed. After that, this cycle processing is terminated.

<Processing during non-AT>
Next, the non-AT processing executed in step S704 of the periodic processing (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

In the non-AT processing, when the lottery result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S801: YES), the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written in the sub RAM 84 (step S802).

In the non-AT processing, when the stop command command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S803: YES), the stop order data is stored on the sub side in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. Write to RAM 84 (step S804).

In the non-AT processing, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S805: YES), it is determined whether or not a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the non-AT state (the state where the value of the AT state counter is "0"), and either prize is generated. be. When a penalty event occurs, the actual medal grant rate may be higher than the medal grant rate in the non-AT state set in the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, the player is disadvantaged, so that the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop in the non-AT state.

When a penalty event occurs, the display data for the penalty is set in the effect data setting process (step S706) in the periodic process (FIG. 23), and the sound data for the penalty is set. .. As a result, the player is notified that the penalty event has occurred.

When a penalty event occurs, addition processing to the penalty counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed (step S807). In the addition process, "5", which is a value corresponding to the number of penalty games, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. After that, the non-AT processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S806, the transition chance management process is executed in step S808, and the ceiling game management process is executed in step S809. Then, after the winning process is executed in step S810, the non-AT processing is terminated.

In the transition chance management process (step S808), on condition that the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0", this game is in the normal mode ST1 and the winning combination is selected by the lottery process (FIG. 10). = It is determined whether or not the winner is won by any of 7 to 10. If any of IV = 7 to 10 is won in the normal mode ST1, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed. The lottery process for shifting to the AT state is executed when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is the normal mode ST1 and the control state of the sub MPU 82 is the non-AT state. For example, in a situation where the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is one of the first RT mode ST2, the second RT mode ST3, the additional RT mode ST4, and the bonus RT mode ST5 even though it is in the non-AT state, the lottery process of the winning combination ( Even if the winner is one of IV = 7 to 10 in FIG. 10), the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lottery process for shifting to the AT state from being executed in a situation where the lottery mode is staying in a mode different from the normal mode ST1 due to the occurrence of the penalty event.

In the transition lottery process to the AT state, the AT transition lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side lottery is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. The value of the counter is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the AT transition lottery table. In the AT transition lottery table, if you win at IV = 7, there is a 5% chance that you will win the AT transition, and if you win at IV = 8, you will have a 10% chance of winning the AT transition, IV = If you win at 9, you have a 15% chance of winning the AT transition, and if you win at IV = 10, you have a 20% chance of winning the AT transition.

When the AT transition is won in the transition lottery process to the AT state, the distribution lottery process for determining whether the game state of the transition destination is the bonus state or the ART state is executed. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table common to all IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side lottery counter is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. Is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the distribution lottery table. The distribution lottery table is set so that there is an 80% chance of winning the bonus state and a 20% chance of winning the ART state.

When the bonus state is won, "1" is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the AT in-process process (step S705) in the next periodic process (FIG. 23) and also executes the bonus preparation state process (step S906) described later in the AT in-process process (FIG. 25). Will be. On the other hand, when the ART state is won, "3" is set in the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the AT processing (step S705) in the next periodic processing (FIG. 23) and also executes the ART preparation state processing (step S908) described later in the AT processing (FIG. 25). Will be.

In addition, when the AT transition is won in the transition lottery process to the AT state, the game is not limited to the configuration in which the transition to the AT state is performed, and the AT is not limited to the configuration in which the transition to the AT state is performed. If the transition is won, the transition to the AT state may be performed after the predetermined number of precursor games (for example, 32 games) has been exhausted. In this case, the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect that allows the player to expect the player to shift to the AT state in each game in the situation where the number of precursor games is being measured. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation of the player.

In the game number cancellation management process (step S809), a bonus is given when the number of games set when the bonus state or ART state ends last time is consumed without a new transition to the bonus state. Execute the process to move to the state. That is, each time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, the value of the number of released games is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the remaining number of released games becomes "0", the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "0". 1 ”is set. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 executes the AT in-process process (step S705) in the next periodic process (FIG. 23) and also executes the bonus preparation state process (step S906) described later in the AT in-process process (FIG. 25). Will be.

When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, even if the game is digested, only the value of the penalty counter is subtracted, and the number of released games is not digested. Further, when the number of remaining released games is 32 or less, a precursory state is set, and the precursory effect is executed by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 over the remaining number of games.

In the prize-winning process (step S810), a process for displaying the image corresponding to the current prize-winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and the sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Perform the process to be done.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the AT processing executed in step S705 of the periodic processing (FIG. 23) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In the AT processing, when the stop command command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S901: YES), the stop order data is stored on the sub side in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. Write to RAM 84 (step S902).

In the AT processing, when the winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S903: YES), the winning processing is executed (step S904). In the prize-winning process, a process for displaying the image corresponding to the current prize-winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Perform the process to do so.

In the AT processing, the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is grasped in step S905. As described above, the AT state counter is a counter for specifying whether it is a non-AT state or an AT state by the sub-side MPU 82, and is for specifying the stay mode in the AT state by the sub-side MPU 82. It is a counter of.

As the processes executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state, the bonus preparation state process (step S906) for controlling the execution of the bonus preparation state and the bonus state process (step S907) for controlling the execution of the bonus state. To perform ART preparation state processing (step S908) for controlling execution of the ART preparation state, ART state processing (step S909) for controlling execution of the ART state, and execution control of the ART end branch state. The ART end branch process (step S910) and the additional state process (step S911) for controlling the execution of the additional state are set.

In such a processing configuration, the sub-side MPU 82 specifies from the value of the AT state counter which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. In such identification, the AT-in-AT address table provided in the sub-side ROM 83 is referred to. In the address table during AT, the start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the AT status counter. Hereinafter, the processing contents for controlling the execution of each game state will be described in detail.

<Bonus preparation status processing>
The bonus preparation state process executed in step S906 of the process during AT (FIG. 25) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described.

The bonus preparation state is a state in which, when the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied, the player stays before the transition to the bonus state. In the bonus preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to enable the establishment of the bell prize when winning in any of IV = 1 to 2 on condition that the preparation is not in the penalty state. Is notified, and even if the player wins at any of IV = 3 to 6, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell prize is not notified. Further, in the bonus preparation state, either IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) (hereinafter, Stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R to establish either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize when winning in the bonus opportunity correspondence role (hereinafter, stop of bonus opportunity correspondence) (Also called the order) is notified. This state is the second AT state of the sub-side MPU 82 already described. The transition to the bonus state occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity by winning the bonus opportunity response combination in the situation where the bonus preparation state process is being executed in the sub-side MPU 82. do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the bonus preparation state processing. In the bonus preparation state processing, it is determined whether or not a penalty event during the bonus preparation state has occurred (step S1001). For the penalty event during the bonus preparation state, one of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (Fig. 11) was won and the 1st RT replay prize was established, and the 1st RT mode lottery table (Fig. 16). ) Was won at any of IV = 15 to 18 and the 2nd RT replay prize was established, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Fig. 18) was won at IV = 15 and the 1st special replay prize and the 2nd special were won. It includes the fact that one of the replay prizes has been established. In the bonus preparation state, even if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the main MPU 72 becomes each of the above lottery results, the stop order for shifting the lottery mode is not notified. Then, each of the above winning results for shifting the lottery mode does not occur unless the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. That is, each of the above events is an event that occurs when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop even though the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. The event is set as a penalty event during bonus preparation.

In addition, the penalty event in the bonus preparation state includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were not stopped in the stop order of the bonus trigger response when the bonus trigger response combination was won. In the bonus preparation state, if the bonus trigger response combination is won, the stop order of the bonus trigger response is notified on the image display device 66, but the bonus trigger response is performed even though the notification is executed. The event that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the stop order of is a penalty event during the bonus preparation state.

When a penalty event in the bonus preparation state has occurred (step S1001: YES), "1" is set in the preparation penalty flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1002). The preparing penalty flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that a penalty event has occurred during the bonus preparation state or the ART preparation state. The preparing penalty flag is cleared to "0" when shifting from the bonus preparation state to the bonus state.

In the bonus preparation state processing, when a lottery result command indicating that the winner is won in either IV = 1 or 2 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1003: YES), the preparation penalty flag of the sub RAM 84 is received. On condition that "1" is not set in (step S1004: NO), the stop order setting process for winning a bell is executed (step S1005). In the stop order setting process for the bell prize, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning order. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning in this way, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning when the IV = 1 to 2 is won in the bonus preparation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected number of medals to be obtained per unit game in the bonus preparation state as compared with the normal game state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is not executed.

In the bonus preparation state process, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the winning combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. The fall target combinations are IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16), IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18), and the lottery table for the bonus RT mode (FIG. 20). ) Is IV = 11-16.

When the lottery result command indicating that the fall target combination has been won is received (step S1006: YES), it is determined whether or not the situation should avoid the fall (step S1007). If any of IV = 19 to 24 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won, or any of IV = 16 to 21 in the 2nd RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won. If so, if "1" is not set in the preparation penalty flag of the sub-side RAM 84, it is considered that the situation should be avoided, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1007. For example, if the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied in the ART state, it is possible to shift to the bonus preparation state in the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3. On condition that "1" is not set, it is determined that the situation should avoid falling to the normal mode ST1 side.

On the other hand, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, whether or not "1" is set in the preparation penalty flag of the sub-side RAM 84. Regardless, a negative determination is made in step S1007. It is assumed that the bonus RT mode ST5 shifts to the bonus preparation state, and in this case, it is necessary to temporarily shift the lottery mode from the bonus RT mode ST5 to another mode in order to generate an opportunity to shift to the bonus state. Therefore, the situation in which any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won does not correspond to the situation in which the fall should be avoided regardless of the state of the preparation penalty flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall is executed (step S1008). In the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall, if any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is won, the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning is established. Set the data to notify. Further, in the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall, if any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) is won, the normal replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order. In these cases, the stop operation to enable the normal replay winning is established by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning in this way, the fall from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 and the fall from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 are avoided. Is possible. In particular, by avoiding the fall to the normal mode ST1, when the ART state is changed to the bonus preparation state, it is possible to maintain a state in which the replay probability is high even in the bonus preparation state.

If any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won when the bonus RT mode ST5 shifts to the bonus preparation state, the lottery mode is positively dropped to the normal mode ST1. In order to make the first fall replay winning, the stop order for establishing the winning may be notified.

In the bonus preparation status process, when a lottery result command indicating that the bonus opportunity corresponding role has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1009: YES), the stop order setting process for bonus transition is executed (step S1009: YES). Step S1010). In the stop order setting process for bonus transition, data is set to notify the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the notification of the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger is started. The image display device 66 is displayed and controlled. By notifying the stop order of the bonus opportunity response in this way, it becomes possible to establish either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize when the bonus opportunity response combination is won in the bonus preparation state. ..

In the bonus preparation state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game has won the bonus trigger response combination is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1011: YES), the reels 32L are in the stop order of the bonus trigger response. , 32M, 32R are stopped (step S1012: YES), and "2" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1013). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the bonus state processing (step S907) described later in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the bonus preparation state to the bonus state.

<Bonus state>
Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 to control the execution of the bonus state will be described. In the bonus state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified when the winning is achieved by any of IV = 1 to 6. Further, as described above, in the bonus state, one execution is completed when the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 reaches the end reference number of games (for example, 20 games). Further, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the bonus state, a new execution time is started after the end of one execution time in the bonus state. Further, in the bonus state, the transitionable condition to the ART state may be satisfied, and if the transitionable condition is satisfied, an opportunity to shift to the ART state will occur after the end of the bonus state.

The state in which the bonus state is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 27 and 28. 27 (a) and 28 (a) show the execution period of the bonus state, and FIGS. 27 (b) and 28 (b) show the execution period of the game won by any of IV = 1 to 6. 27 (c) and 28 (c) show the execution period of the game winning in any of IV = 7 to 10, and FIGS. 27 (d) and 28 (d) show the continuous lottery process. The execution timing is shown, FIGS. 27 (e) and 28 (e) show the continuation chance period, FIGS. 27 (f) and 28 (f) show the execution period of the off-stage effect, and FIGS. 27 (g) and 27 (g) and FIG. 28 (g) indicates the execution period of the continuous generation effect.

First, a case where the continuation condition of the bonus state is not satisfied in the middle of the bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 27.

At the timing of t1, the bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 27 (a). Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), a winning game is played at any of IV = 1 to 6 at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t6, and during the period of t4 to t5, As shown in FIG. 27 (c), a winning game is played in any of IV = 7 to 10 in each of the period from t7 to t8 and the period from t9 to t10. In this case, in the game in which IV = 1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the bell winning is notified. Further, in the game winning in any of IV = 1 to 6, the remaining number of end reference games is subtracted.

On the other hand, in each of the games winning in any of IV = 7 to 10, the continuous lottery process is executed as shown in FIG. 27 (d) (timing of t5, timing of t8, timing of t10). In the continuous lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to give an opportunity to newly start one execution of the bonus state. However, in the game in which the continuous lottery process is executed, the result of the lottery process is not notified to the player.

After that, at the timing of t11, the winning game is started with IV = 1 to 6 in the situation where the value of the remaining number of end reference games is "1". In this case, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is waited, and the continuation chance period is executed in the waited state. In the continuation chance period, when the continuous lottery process is performed in the current bonus state or the bonus state before that, and the notification trigger event for which the lottery result is not notified remains, the notification trigger is given. The result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the event is notified to the player by using the unit effect on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, the out-of-order effect is executed in the unit effect for the notification trigger event corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process, and the continuous occurrence effect is performed in the unit effect for the notification trigger event in which the result of the continuous lottery process corresponds to the continuous winning result. Is executed.

In the case of FIG. 27, in detail, the continuation chance period is started as shown in FIG. 27 (e) at the timing of t11 when the winning game is started in any of IV = 1 to 6, and the continuation chance period is started in t12. At each of the timing, the timing of t13, the timing of t14, and the timing of t15, the unit staging in which the deviating staging is executed is started as shown in FIG. 27 (f). This time, the result of the continuous lottery process is out of continuation, and four notification trigger events corresponding to the result are stored. Therefore, the unit effect in which the off-effect effect is executed is repeated four times. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the continuation chance period ends at the timing of t16, which is after the unit effect in which the off-effect effect is executed is executed four times. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in this game is executed, is started. After that, at the timing of t17, the final game in the bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 27 (b). Since the condition for continuing the bonus state is not satisfied this time, the bonus state ends at the timing of t18 as shown in FIG. 27 (a).

Next, a case where the continuation condition of the bonus state is satisfied in the middle of the bonus state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28.

Similar to the case of FIG. 27, at the timing of t11, the winning game is started with IV = 1 to 6 in the situation where the value of the remaining end reference games is “1”. Then, in a state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is waiting, the continuation chance period is as shown in FIG. 28 (e). Is started.

After that, after the unit staging in which the deviating staging is executed as shown in FIG. 28 (f) at each of the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14 is started, the staging of t16 is shown in FIG. 28 (g). As shown, the unit effect in which the continuous generation effect is executed is started. That is, this time, the result of the continuous lottery process is continuously out of continuation, and three notification trigger events corresponding to the result are stored, and the order in which the unit effect is executed is the continuous lottery in the order after those notification trigger events. The result of processing is a situation in which one notification trigger event corresponding to the continuous winning result is stored. Therefore, after the unit effect in which the disengagement effect is executed is repeated three times, the unit effect in which the continuous generation effect is executed is executed.

Then, at the timing of t16, the continuation chance period ends as shown in FIG. 28 (e). In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in this game is executed, is started. After that, at the timing of t17, the final game in the bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 28 (b). Since the condition for continuing the bonus state is satisfied this time, the bonus state will continue as it is without ending.

As described above, in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed with the winning at IV = 7 to 10. Then, the result of the continuous lottery process is not immediately notified, but the stop control corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (FIG. 10) in the current game is executed in the final game in the bonus state. A continuation chance period that occurs in a state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is awaited is secured, and the result of the continuation lottery process is individually notified in the continuation chance period. As a result, when the bonus state ends, there may be a continuation chance period in which the lottery results of the continuous lottery process are collectively notified, so that it is possible to create a period in which the player's expectation increases in the bonus state. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 to execute the continuation chance period.

The main RAM 74 stores the result of the winning / failing result first storage area 101a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winning result is IV = 7, and the winning / failing result first storage area 101a. It is executed when the first determination number counter 101b for specifying the number of lottery result data which is the lottery result data and does not trigger the execution of the unit effect by the main MPU 72 and IV = 8 are won. The lottery result data stored in the win / fail result second storage area 102a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process and the lottery result data stored in the win / fail result second storage area 102a and not as an opportunity to execute the unit effect. The second determination count counter 102b for specifying the number of the numbers on the main MPU 72, and the pass / fail result third storage area 103a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winner is won at IV = 9. The third determination number counter 103b for specifying the number of lottery result data stored in the third storage area 103a of the result of winning / failing and not triggering the execution of the unit effect by the main MPU 72. With the winning / failing result 4th storage area 104a for storing the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winning is achieved at IV = 10, and the lottery result data stored in the winning / failing result 4th storage area 104a. It is stored in the 4th determination number counter 104b for specifying the number of lottery result data that does not trigger the execution of the unit effect by the main MPU 72, and in the 1st to 4th storage areas 101a to 104a of the winning / failing result. A pass / fail determination number counter 105 is provided for the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of lottery result data that is the lottery result data and does not trigger the execution of the unit effect.

Whether or not each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a has a data capacity of a plurality of bits, and specifically has a data capacity of 4 bytes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be 3 bytes or less or 5 bytes or more. Win / Fail Results Lottery result data indicating the result of the continuous lottery process can be stored in each of the bits of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a. Specifically, either "0" or "1" is set as binary data corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process in each bit of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a as a result of success or failure. In this case, the lottery result data indicating that the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result is "1", and the lottery result data indicating that the result of the continuous lottery process is the wrong result is "0".

In each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the order in which the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process is set is predetermined, and the lottery result is up to the bit in the nth order. When it becomes necessary to set new lottery result data in the situation where the data is set, the new lottery result data is set in the bit in the nth + 1st order. In this case, the nth + 1st bit is set in the determination count counters corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is set this time in the first to fourth determination count counters 101b to 104b. It is a bit in the order of the value obtained by adding 1 to the existing value.

Whether or not the result: In each of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the bits for which the unit effect is executed are limited to the bits in the first order (for example, the bits existing in the lower right position in FIG. 29). ing. When the lottery result data set in the bits of the first order is the execution target of the unit effect, the lottery result data is read out by the first to fourth determination count counters 101b to 104b. The shift process is executed for each bit of the stored storage areas 101a to 104a. Specifically, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1st bit with the mth bit is executed. The shift process is performed on all the bits in order from the bit on the earliest side in which the unit effect is executed.

The data set in the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a, the first to fourth judgment count counters 101b to 104b, and the hit / fail judgment count counter 105 can be used when one execution round in the bonus state is started. It is not cleared when it ends, and can be stored for multiple executions of the bonus state. The details will be described later, but when the unit effect in which the continuation generation effect is executed is executed during the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the continuation chance period is the continuation chance period even if the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains. It is terminated, and after the end of the current execution times of the bonus state, a new execution time of the bonus state is started. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect is taken over to the new execution times in the bonus state as it is. Therefore, even if the continuous lottery process is not executed even once in the bonus state of the new execution times, the lottery result data for the inherited amount remains, so that the new execution times A continuation chance period will occur in the bonus state.

The first determination count counter 101b, the second determination count counter 102b, the third determination count counter 103b, and the fourth determination count counter 104b are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a. In the configuration in which the number of stored lottery result data is stored, the values stored in the first to fourth determination count counters 101b to 104b are notified by the image display device 66 in the bonus state. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the broadcast image.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the bonus state, the number-of-times notification image G1 is displayed on the image display device 66. In the number-of-times notification image G1, an image showing a value stored in the first determination number-of-time counter 101b (display content of "A = 1" in FIG. 30) and a value stored in the second determination number-of-time counter 102b are used. An image showing (display content of "B = 0" in FIG. 30), an image showing a value stored in the third determination count counter 103b (display content of "C = 1" in FIG. 30), and a fourth determination. An image showing the value stored in the number-of-times counter 104b (display content of "D = 1" in FIG. 30) is displayed.

The display of the number-of-times notification image G1 is continuously performed for both the period before the continuation chance period and the continuation chance period in the bonus state. Specifically, when the bonus state starts, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 starts, and when the bonus state ends, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 ends. Then, when the continuous lottery process is executed in the period before the continuous chance period in the bonus state, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the IV value that triggered the execution of the continuous lottery process are added by 1. As a result, the value of the display content corresponding to the determination count counters 101b to 104b, which is the execution target of the 1 addition, is added by 1. Further, in the continuation chance period in the bonus state, when the unit effect is executed, the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the unit effect is executed is subtracted by 1. As a result, the value of the display content corresponding to the determination count counters 101b to 104b for which the 1 subtraction is executed is subtracted by 1. By displaying the number-of-times notification image G1 as described above, the game is played while recognizing the number of executions of the unit effect executed when the continuation chance period occurs in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state. It becomes possible to perform the game while recognizing the number of executions of the remaining unit effects that can be executed during the continuation chance period.

<Bonus RT management process>
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a bonus RT management process executed by the main MPU 72. The bonus RT management process is executed in step S211 which is a process timing after the reel control process in step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 9). That is, the bonus RT management process is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is performed in one game, is completed.

In the bonus RT management process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bonus RT start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1101). As described above, the bonus RT start flag is a flag in which "1" is set when the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 in the lottery mode transition process (FIG. 22). However, "1" is set in the bonus RT start flag on condition that the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 is performed in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". The bell establishment counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in the bonus state has reached the end reference game number. Then, the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter is 1 or more means that the bonus state is in effect. Therefore, the situation in which "1" is set in the bonus RT start flag means that the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 has shifted to the bonus RT mode ST5 in a situation other than the bonus state.

When "1" is set in the bonus RT start flag (step S1101: YES), "20" corresponding to the number of end reference games is set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, and the bonus RT of the main RAM 74 is started. The flag is cleared to "0", and "1" is set to the bonus RT in-progress flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1102). After that, "1" is set in the bonus output start flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1103). The bonus output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output corresponding to the start of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be performed.

If the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 when the conditions for shifting to the bonus state are not satisfied, the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 each have the bonus state and ART. The execution of the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state, which is neither of the states, is continued.

In the bonus RT management process, when "1" is set in the bonus RT in-progress flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1104: YES), IV = 7 to in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) in this game. On condition that the player wins in any of 10 (step S1105: YES), the continuous lottery table corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S1106). Then, the continuous lottery process is executed (step S1107). In the continuous lottery process, the value of the main side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the value of the main side lottery counter is collated with the continuous lottery table. The continuous lottery table is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence to the values of IV = 7 to 10, and in the case of IV = 7, the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning result with a probability of 10%, and IV = In the case of 8, the continuous lottery process has a 20% probability of a continuous winning result, in the case of IV = 9, the continuous lottery process has a 30% probability of a continuous winning result, and in the case of IV = 10, the continuous winning result is continued. Each continuous lottery table is set so that the continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 40% in the lottery process.

Here, as described above, the continuous lottery process is not always executed when any of IV = 7 to 10 is won, but is won by any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5. Will only be executed if If the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 due to the stop operation corresponding to the player's penalty event even though the sub MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the first fall in the bonus RT mode ST5. The lottery mode immediately falls to the normal mode ST1 due to the fact that the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. In this case, the continuous lottery process is executed only when the winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5, so that the main MPU 72 is not in the bonus state in the game state. Even if the processing after step S1105 in the bonus RT management processing (FIG. 31) is executed, the probability that the continuous lottery processing is executed in the situation can be reduced. Then, by lowering the probability that the continuous lottery process is executed in this way, the probability that the continuation chance period will occur in the situation where the game state is not the bonus state and the new execution times of the bonus state will be continuously executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of being killed.

After executing the continuous lottery process (step S1107), the continuous lottery result storage process is executed (step S1108). In the storage process of the continuous lottery result, if the continuous lottery process is executed when IV = 7 is won, the number of first determinations in the first storage area 101a as a result of winning or failing of the main RAM 74 A value of "0" or "1" corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery processing this time is set for the bits in the order of adding 1 to the value of the counter 101b. Then, after setting the lottery result data, the value of the first determination number counter 101b is added by 1. Further, when the continuous lottery process this time is executed when IV = 8 is won, the value of the second determination count counter 102b is set to 1 in the second storage area 102a as the result of winning or failing of the main RAM 74. A value of "0" or "1" corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery processing this time is set for the bits in the order of addition. Then, after setting the lottery result data, the value of the second determination number counter 102b is added by 1. Further, when the continuous lottery process is executed when IV = 9 is won, the value of the third determination count counter 103b is set to 1 in the third storage area 103a as the result of winning or failing of the main RAM 74. A value of "0" or "1" corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery processing this time is set for the bits in the order of addition. Then, after setting the lottery result data, the value of the third determination number counter 103b is added by 1. Further, when the continuous lottery process this time is executed when IV = 10 is won, the value of the fourth determination count counter 104b is set to 1 in the fourth storage area 104a as the result of winning or failing of the main RAM 74. A value of "0" or "1" corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery processing this time is set for the bits in the order of addition. Then, after setting the lottery result data, the value of the fourth determination number counter 104b is added by 1.

In the bonus RT management process, if the game is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 regardless of the type of lottery mode (step S1109: YES), it does not matter whether the bell prize is established or not. , The value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1110). That is, when the main MPU 72 wins in any of IV = 1 to 6, the remaining number of end reference games is subtracted by 1 regardless of the current lottery mode and whether or not the bell winning is established. As a result, even if the lottery mode is intentionally shifted from the bonus RT mode ST5 or the bell winning is avoided to prolong the state of continuing to the bonus state, it is impossible to do so. Is possible.

When the value of the bell establishment counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1111: YES), it means that the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 has reached the end reference game number. do. In this case, the end branch processing for determining the control state in the main MPU 72 after that is executed (step S1112). The processing content of the end branch processing will be described later.

<Bonus state processing>
Next, the bonus state processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bonus state processing is executed in step S907 in the AT processing (FIG. 25).

In the bonus state processing, when the lottery result command indicating that the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1201: YES), the stop order setting process for winning the bell is performed. Execute (step S1202). In the stop order setting process for the bell prize, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning order. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning in this way, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning when the IV = 1 to 6 is won in the bonus state. Therefore, the expected number of medals per unit game in the bonus state is belled only in the normal game state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize is not executed and when IV = 1 or 2 is won. It is possible to raise the stop order for winning a prize higher than the bonus preparation state in which the notification is notified. It should be noted that the first AT state of the sub-side MPU 82 is a state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning is notified when the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in this way.

In the bonus state processing, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the winning combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72. As already explained, the fall target combinations are IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16), IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18), and bonus RT mode. It is IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table (FIG. 20).

When the lottery result command indicating that the winning combination has been won is received (step S1203: YES), the stop order setting process for avoiding the fall is executed (step S1204). In the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of a normal replay prize regardless of which fall target combination is used. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the above is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize in this way, the fall from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, the fall from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1, and the bonus. It is possible to avoid a fall from the RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1. In particular, by avoiding the fall to the normal mode ST1, it is possible to maintain a state in which the replay probability is high in the bonus state.

Even if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for avoiding the fall from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 is notified in the bonus state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order. If not, the first fall replay prize is established and the lottery mode falls to the normal mode ST1. In this case, although it is in a bonus state, the replay probability is relatively low. Further, when the lottery mode is changed to the normal mode ST1, there is a possibility of becoming the first RT mode ST2, and when the lottery mode is changed to the first RT mode ST2, there is a possibility of becoming the second RT mode ST3. When the mode becomes the second RT mode ST3, there is a possibility that the additional RT mode ST4 becomes. In this case, even if the winning combination is won in the lottery mode of either the 1st RT mode ST2 or the 2nd RT mode ST3 in the bonus state, the stop order for avoiding the fall is notified, so that in the bonus state. It is possible to maintain a state with a high replay probability.

In the bonus state processing, when a lottery result command indicating that the bonus opportunity corresponding combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1205: YES), the stop order setting process for bonus transition is executed (step S1206). .. In the stop order setting process for bonus transition, data is set to notify the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the notification of the stop order corresponding to the bonus trigger is started. The image display device 66 is displayed and controlled. By notifying the stop order of the bonus trigger response in this way, it is possible to establish either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize when the bonus trigger response combination is won in the bonus state. The process of step S1206 is executed in the bonus state when the lottery mode falls from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 in the bonus state, and then the bonus opportunity responding combination is won.

In the bonus state processing, when a lottery result command indicating that the player has won in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is received (step S1207: YES), the ART state. (Step S1208). In the ART generation lottery process, the ART generation lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side lottery counter is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. Is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the ART generation lottery table. In the ART generation lottery table, if IV = 7 is won, there is a 5% probability that ART will be won, and if IV = 8 is won, there is a 10% chance that ART will be won, IV = If the player wins at 9, the probability of winning the ART is 15%, and if the player wins at IV = 10, the probability of winning the ART is 20%.

When the ART state is generated and won in the ART state generation lottery process (step S1209: YES), the addition process of the remaining ART execution counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is executed (step S1210). The remaining ART execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining execution times in the ART state by the sub-side MPU 82, and in step S1210, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is added by 1. The processing contents after step S1211 in the bonus state processing will be described later.

<Continuation chance period>
Next, the continuation chance period that occurs in the bonus state will be described in detail.

In the continuation chance period, as already explained, each of the lottery results of the continuous lottery process executed in the current bonus state or the bonus state before that is executed in a one-to-one correspondence with each lottery result. The player is notified by the production content of the unit production to be performed. The unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Specifically, in the continuation chance period, the first credit is obtained in a state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, is prevented. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to move in the circumferential direction on condition that the throwing button 47 is operated by the player or the start restriction period elapses, and continues if it is a unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result. The movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped while the combination of the symbols of the winning mode is displayed in a straight line, and the combination of the symbols of the continuous winning mode is displayed in a straight line if it is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result. The movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped without any trouble.

The operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory views of FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (d).

When the continuation chance period is started, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R moves in the circumferential direction by utilizing the opening period surely generated at the start of the continuation chance period, as shown in FIG. 33 (a). The movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped at the standby position which is the stop mode of the symbol. The rotation speed in this case is the same as the rotation speed at the constant speed of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed.

In the standby position, on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the upper row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle row, and the "watermelon" symbol on the lower row stop, and on the middle reel 32M, the "bell" symbol on the upper row and the "cherry" symbol on the middle row. , The "BAR" symbol stops at the bottom, the "BAR" symbol stops at the top, the "cherry" symbol stops at the middle, and the "Replay 2" symbol stops at the bottom of the right reel 32R. In this case, the three "cherry" symbols are stopped in a straight line in the sub-line SL3 in the middle stage, but the same symbol may not be stopped and displayed in a straight line in the standby position.

When moving to the standby position, all reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the same direction. This rotation direction is the same as the rotation direction of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. Further, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed by the main MPU 72, and the main MPU 72 determines whether or not each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has reached the standby position, respectively. , 32R is performed using the number of steps of the stepping motor provided. Specifically, the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R before the start of movement is specified from the number of steps of the stepping motor of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R before the start of movement toward the standby position. Then, the number of steps corresponding to the difference between the specified rotation position and the standby position is calculated for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated by the calculated number of steps. To move to the standby position. The movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the standby position is performed at a constant rotation speed regardless of the number of steps required to move to the standby position. In this case, since the fixed opening period of the continuation chance period is set so as to be longer than the maximum time assumed as the time required for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to move to the standby position, each reel 32L, The movement of the 32M and 32R to the standby position is surely completed within the range of the opening period.

An index sensor is individually provided for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the index sensor corresponding to each time the reels 32L, 32M, 32R make one round turns off the detection state of OFF → ON → OFF. Replacement occurs. When the main MPU 72 specifies the occurrence of the switching of the detection state from the reception result of the signal, the number of steps grasping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the switching of the detection state has occurred is cleared by "0". ..

The unit effect is started in the state where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged in the standby position. When the unit effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33B, the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R start rotating in the direction in which the symbol moves downward, and the middle reel 32M starts rotating in the direction in which the symbol moves upward. Start spinning. In this case, the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at a constant speed at which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. The speed is slower than that, and the rotation speed is such that the player can clearly identify the symbol that can be visually recognized on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

When the unit effect is started, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates in each of the above directions in both the case where the unit effect corresponds to the continuous winning result and the case where the unit effect corresponds to the continuous loss result. By starting the above, the "BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R approaches the sub-line SL3 in the middle stage. Then, in the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result, the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the continuous corresponding positions, and as shown in FIG. 33 (c), three "BAR" symbols are displayed on the middle subline SL3. It will stop in a straight line. As a result, the stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result is shown on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the occurrence of the continuous winning result is notified to the player.

On the other hand, in the unit production corresponding to the continuous disengagement result, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed at the timing before the "BAR" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches the subline SL3 in the middle stage. The direction is opposite to the previous rotation direction. That is, the rotation direction of the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R is changed so that the symbol moves upward, and the rotation direction of the middle reel 32M is changed so that the symbol moves downward. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R returns to the standby position. As a result, the stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result is not shown on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, so that the player is notified of the occurrence of the continuous loss result. In addition, even in the case of a continuous winning result, the player moves from the standby position to a position corresponding to the continuous winning result in the stop display mode, and returns to the standby position without becoming the stop display mode corresponding to the continuous winning result. Since this operation is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, it is possible to execute a unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result by using the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In any configuration where the operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is different between the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result and the unit effect corresponding to the continuous loss result, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stand by. The period required from the start of rotation from the position to the stop at the stop position corresponding to each lottery result is constant. As a result, the period required for the unit production can be fixed regardless of whether the unit production corresponds to the continuous winning result or the unit production corresponding to the continuous loss result.

The amount of movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the continuous support position is one frame until the "BAR" symbol existing in the upper or lower stage moves to the middle stage. In addition, the amount of movement until the rotation direction is reversed and the standby position is returned to the standby position before reaching the continuation corresponding position in the continuous disconnection result is also one frame or less. This reduces the time required to execute one unit effect in a configuration in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a speed at which the type of moving symbol can be clearly recognized in the unit effect. It is possible to plan.

In the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed in the continuation chance period. The reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be rotated. That is, during the continuation chance period, the rotation of the normal reels 32L, 32M, 32R is blocked. In particular, during the continuation chance period, the process for progressing one game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41 in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is "1" in the bonus state, and the start lever 41 It is started when the winning combination is won by any of IV = 1 to 6 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) executed based on the operation. Then, the operation by the player for starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is completed. The start of normal rotation will be blocked and the continuation chance period will be executed.

The period in which the rotation start of the normal reels 32L, 32M, 32R is prevented coincides with the continuation period of the continuation chance period, and the continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of executions of the unit effect. Here, the number of executions of the unit effect executed in the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the execution target of the unit effect. In addition, during the continuation chance period, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed, the continuation chance period ends even if the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains. .. That is, the number of executions of the unit effect executed in the continuation chance period also varies depending on the timing at which the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. Further, the unit effect is started at that time when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated within the range of the start restriction period, and the first credit insertion button 47 is not operated within the range of the start restriction period. If so, it will be started when the start restriction period has passed. That is, the continuation period of the continuation chance period also changes depending on the timing at which the start trigger of the unit production executed within the continuation chance period occurs. In addition, when the continuation chance period ends based on the execution of the unit production corresponding to the continuation winning result, the ending period is set and the continuation chance period ends when the ending period elapses. , If the continuation chance period ends without executing the unit production corresponding to the continuation winning result, the continuation chance period ends without setting the ending period. That is, the continuation period of the continuation chance period varies depending on whether or not the unit production corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed.

In a configuration in which the continuation chance period varies depending on the number of executions of the unit production, the continuation period of the continuation chance period is not determined at the start of the continuation chance period, but every time the start condition of the unit production is newly established, the continuation chance period The duration of is extended. The state in which the continuation period of the continuation chance period is extended will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 (a) shows a case where the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed twice and the continuation chance period ends, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the case where the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed three times. The case where the continuation chance period ends is shown, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the case where the unit effect corresponding to the continuation loss result is executed twice and then the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed once and the continuation chance period ends. The case of doing is shown. In any of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), each unit effect is assumed to be started when the start restriction period elapses.

In any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c), the opening period is set when the continuation chance period is started. The opening period is constant regardless of the content of the continuation chance period (for example, 10 sec). In this case, only the opening period is set at the start of the continuation chance period, and the start restriction period corresponding to the unit effect executed thereafter and the execution continuation period of the unit effect are not set.

After that, when the opening period has elapsed, the start restriction period corresponding to the execution times of the first unit effect is set in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). This extends the duration of the continuation chance period. The start restriction period is always constant (for example, 15 sec).

After that, when the first start restriction period has elapsed, the first unit production is started in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). The unit effect continues from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the stop at the position corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process, but the continuation period is constant (for example). 13 sec). By starting the unit production, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

After that, when the first unit effect is completed, the start restriction period corresponding to the execution time of the second unit effect is set in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). This extends the duration of the continuation chance period.

After that, when the second start restriction period has elapsed, the second unit production is started in any of the cases of FIGS. 34 (a) to 34 (c). As a result, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

After that, when the unit production for two times is completed, in the case of FIG. 34 (a), the continuation chance period ends at that point. On the other hand, in the case of FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the start restriction period corresponding to the execution times of the third unit effect is set. This extends the duration of the continuation chance period.

After that, when the third start restriction period has elapsed, the third unit production is started in both cases of FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c). As a result, the duration of the continuation chance period is substantially extended.

After that, when the third unit effect is completed, in the case of FIG. 34 (b), since the third unit effect is the unit effect corresponding to the continuous discontinuity result, the continuation chance period ends at that point. On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 34 (c), the ending period is set (for example, 13 sec) because the third unit effect is the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. Then, when the ending period ends, the continuation chance period ends at that point.

As described above, the duration of the continuation chance period is extended each time various events occur. In the case of a configuration in which the continuation period of the continuation chance period is set at the start of the continuation chance period, it is necessary to determine the execution content of the continuation chance period at the start of the continuation chance period. In this case, the processing load at the start of the continuation chance period becomes extremely high. On the other hand, since the continuation period of the continuation chance period is configured to be extended each time various events occur, the processing load for setting the continuation period of the continuation chance period is distributed, and at the start of the continuation chance period. It is possible to prevent the processing load in the above from becoming extremely high.

Further, in the case of a configuration in which the continuation period of the continuation chance period is set at the start of the continuation chance period, a configuration capable of measuring the longest period assumed as the continuation chance period is required. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the counter provided in the main RAM 74 is used to measure the period, the data capacity required to secure the counter becomes considerably large. On the other hand, since the continuation period of the continuation chance period is extended each time various events occur, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for measuring the continuation chance period.

Next, how the continuation chance period progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 35 (a) shows the continuation chance period, FIG. 35 (b) shows the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a normal game, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production. FIG. 35 (d) shows the rotation period, FIG. 35 (d) shows the opening period that occurs when the continuation chance period starts, and FIG. 35 (e) shows the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit staging, and FIG. 35. (F) shows the start restriction period before the unit effect is started, and FIG. 35 (g) shows the execution timing of the unit effect start operation.

In the bonus state, at the timing of t1, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the normal game ends as shown in FIG. 35 (b). After that, a new game start operation is performed at the timing of t2, but this time IV = 1 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the situation where the value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is "1". Since the game is won in any of 6 to 6, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the normal game is not started as shown in FIG. 35 (b), but as shown in FIG. 35 (a). The continuation chance period starts at. In this case, the measurement of the opening period is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 35 (d). Further, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), rotation for moving to the standby position is started in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

Incidentally, at the timing of t2, the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the stop positions in the game finished at the timing of t1. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate from this arbitrary stop position toward the standby position.

Then, at the timing of t3, the opening period elapses as shown in FIG. 35 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the standby position is completed at the timing before the timing of the t3, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is in a stopped state at the standby position. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the measurement of the start limit period corresponding to the unit effect of the first execution time is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (g), the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect at the timing of t4, which is the timing before the start restriction period elapses. As a result, at the timing of t4, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit staging are started as shown in FIG. 35 (c).

Since the unit effect this time is a unit effect corresponding to the result of continuous disengagement, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is predetermined before being arranged at the continuous corresponding position. The rotation direction is reversed at the timing of t5 when the intermediate position is reached, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R return to the standby position at the timing of t6. At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the first execution round of the unit effect ends. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the measurement of the start limit period corresponding to the unit effect of the next execution time is started.

After that, when the start restriction period elapses at the timing of t7, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the unit staging are started as shown in FIG. 35 (c). Since the unit effect this time is also a unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result, the rotation direction is reversed because the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are in the middle position at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 35 (e). The reels 32L, 32M, 32R return to the standby position at the timing of t9. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the second execution of the unit effect ends. Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the measurement of the start limit period corresponding to the unit effect of the next execution time is started.

After that, at the timing of t10, which is the timing before the start restriction period elapses, the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect as shown in FIG. 35 (g). As a result, at the timing of t10, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit staging are started as shown in FIG. 35 (c).

Since the unit effect this time is a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), each reel 32L, 32M, 32R continues without changing the rotation direction in the middle position. The reels 32L, 32M, 32R move toward the corresponding position, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R reach the continuous corresponding position at the timing of t11, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. In this case, the measurement of the ending period is started at the timing of t11, and the ending period elapses at the timing of t12, so that the continuation chance period ends as shown in FIG. 35 (a). Then, at the timing of t12, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a normal game is started as shown in FIG. 35 (b). In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started from the stop position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the timing of t11.

<Process for starting the continuation chance period>
The operation in the above continuation chance period is executed under the control of the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, the processing configuration of the main MPU 72 for controlling the execution of the continuation chance period will be described in detail. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a continuation chance period executed in step S311 in the lottery process (FIG. 10).

The value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is "1", and in the lottery process (FIG. 10) of this execution time, the player wins with any of IV = 1 to 6, and further, the hit / fail determination counter of the main RAM 74. When the value of 105 is 1 or more (step S1301 to step S1303: YES), the start setting process of the continuation chance period shown in step S1304 and subsequent steps is executed.

For details on the start setting process, first, "1" is set in the continuation chance flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1304). The continuation chance flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the continuation chance period is in progress. After that, the value corresponding to the opening period (for example, 10 sec) is set in the period measurement counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1305). The value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

After that, the number of steps of the stepping motor of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the current stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the standby position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. By calculating the difference from the number of steps of the stepping motor, the number of steps to the standby position is calculated individually for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1306). As the number of steps of the former, the number of steps used for the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the previous game is used. The latter number of steps is stored in advance in the main ROM 73.

After that, the drive table corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S1306 is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74 (step S1307). A plurality of types of the drive table are stored for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set to have a one-to-one correspondence with the number of steps that can be calculated in step S1306. There is. In the drive table, data of the drive control pattern necessary for moving from the corresponding movement source position to the standby position is set. In step S1307, the drive table corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S1306 is read out for each of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R.

After that, permission setting for rotation drive control is performed (step S1308). As a result, the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to each drive table read in step S1307.

After that, the continuation chance start command is set (step S1309). The continuation chance start command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 so as to know that the continuation chance period has started. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation chance start command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the command-corresponding setting process is executed (step S1212). In the command-corresponding setting process in this case, data is set for executing the effect corresponding to the opening period of the continuation chance period on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. The production corresponding to the opening period starts when the opening period starts and ends when the opening period ends. Then, in the production corresponding to the opening period, it is notified that the continuation chance period will start, and the game content of the continuation chance period will be explained.

When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation chance start command in a situation where the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is not "2", a forcible waiting time for the progress of the game occurs due to the occurrence of a penalty event. The image display device 66 is made to perform the notification for making the player recognizable. The notification is continued until either the continuation chance end command or the continuation result correspondence command described later is received from the main MPU 72. As a result, even if the unit effect is started on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a situation where the effect corresponding to the bonus state is not executed by the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66, it is a penalty event. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution is caused by the occurrence of.

<Processing for continuation chance>
When the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S207 in the normal processing (FIG. 9) and executes the continuation chance processing in step S208. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the process for continuation chance.

In the continuation chance processing, when the opening period of the continuation chance period has not elapsed (step S1401: NO), the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the standby position is completed (step S1402 :). YES), the rotation drive control is prohibited (step S1403). This prohibits the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When the opening period of the continuation chance period has elapsed (step S1401: YES) and the current processing time is the first processing time after the opening period has elapsed (step S1404: YES), the main RAM 74 A start limit period (for example, 15 sec) is set in the provided period measurement counter (step S1405). As described above, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the continuation chance processing, after the opening period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), the reel control for unit production is not performed (step S1406: NO), and the continuation chance period is canceled. In the undisturbed situation (step S1407: NO), when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect (step S1408: YES), or when the start restriction period during the current measurement has elapsed (step S1408: YES). Step S1409: YES), the process for starting the unit effect shown in step S1410 and subsequent steps is executed.

In the process for starting the unit effect, first, a process for specifying the storage area is executed (step S1410). FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a storage area specifying process. In the storage area specifying process, when the value of the fourth determination count counter 104b of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1501: YES), the hit / fail result of the main RAM 74 is the read target bit (first) in the fourth storage area 104a. The lottery result data set in (bit) of) is read (step S1502). The read target bit is a bit in which lottery result data having the first order stored in the hit / fail result 4th storage area 104a among the lottery result data stored in the win / fail result 4th storage area 104a is stored. Is. This also applies to the first to third storage areas 101a to 103a as a result of success or failure.

In the storage area specifying process, when the value of the fourth determination count counter 104b of the main RAM 74 is “0” and the value of the third determination count counter 103b is 1 or more (step S1503: YES), the main RAM 74 In the third storage area 103a, the lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) is read (step S1504). Further, when both the value of the third determination count counter 103b and the value of the fourth determination count counter 104b of the main RAM 74 are "0" and the value of the second determination count counter 102b is 1 or more (step S1505: YES), the lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) in the second storage area 102a of the result of hit / fail of the main RAM 74 is read (step S1506). Further, when the value of the second determination count counter 102b, the value of the third determination count counter 103b, and the value of the fourth determination count counter 104b of the main RAM 74 are all "0" (step S1505: NO), the main side The lottery result data set in the read target bit (first bit) in the first storage area 101a of the result of hit / fail of the RAM 74 is read (step S1507).

The lottery result data read out in the storage area identification process becomes the lottery result data of the execution trigger of this unit production, and in this unit production, the lottery result data of the execution trigger is either the continuous winning result or the continuous loss result. You will be notified if it corresponds to. In this case, by executing the storage area specifying process as described above, in the continuation chance period, the pass / fail result 4th storage area 104a → the pass / fail result 3rd storage area 103a → the pass / fail result 2nd storage area 102a → the pass / fail result. Priority is given to the execution target of the unit effect in the order of the first storage area 101a.

Here, as already described, the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winning result is won at IV = 7 is stored in the winning / failing result first storage area 101a as the lottery result data, and the winning / failing result second storage area 102a is stored. The result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winner is won at IV = 8 is stored as lottery result data, and the result is executed when the winner is won at IV = 9 in the third storage area 103a of the winning / failing result. The result of the continuous lottery process is stored as lottery result data, and the result of the continuous lottery process executed when the winner is won at IV = 10 is stored as the lottery result data in the winning / failing result fourth storage area 104a. The probability of winning a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is highest when winning at IV = 10, the next highest when winning at IV = 9, and when winning at IV = 8. The next highest is the lowest when winning at IV = 7. In this case, since the priority selected as the execution target of the unit effect is set as described above, the unit effect is selected in order from the lottery result data on the side with the highest probability of being a continuous winning result. The Rukoto. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the unit effect, which is the result of continuous winning, will be executed at an early stage.

Returning to the explanation of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37), when the lottery result data is read in the storage area specifying process (step S1410), it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result. Determination (step S1411). When the continuous disconnection result is supported (step S1411: NO), the drive table corresponding to the continuous disconnection result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74 (step S1412). In the drive table corresponding to the continuous disconnection result, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R arranged in the standby position starts moving toward the continuous corresponding position, and when it reaches a predetermined intermediate position, it is up to that point. The data of the drive control pattern necessary for the operation of moving in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of and returning to the standby position is set. Further, in step S1412, permission setting for rotation drive control is performed. As a result, the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to the drive table corresponding to the continuous disconnection result. After that, "1" is set in the unit directing flag provided in the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0" (step S1413). The unit effect in progress flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the unit effect is being executed. Further, the bonus continuation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed in the continuation chance period.

On the other hand, when the lottery result data read in the storage area specifying process corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S1411: YES), the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74. (Step S1414). In the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R arranged in the standby position starts moving toward the continuous corresponding position and reaches the continuous corresponding position. The control pattern data is set. Further, in step S1414, permission setting for rotation drive control is performed. As a result, the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is permitted, and the drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed according to the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result. After that, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1415).

When the process of step S1413 or step S1415 is executed, the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area shift process is executed in step S1416. In the counter subtraction process, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, in the storage area shift process, the data stored in the m + 1th bit is overwritten on the mth bit in the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data has been read this time. The shift process is performed on all the bits in order from the bit on the earliest side in which the unit effect is executed.

After that, the start command of the unit effect is set (step S1417). The unit production start command is a command sent to the sub-side MPU 82 to know that the unit production has been newly started, and the unit production this time corresponds to either the continuous winning result or the continuous loss result. Contains information indicating whether or not it is present. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the unit effect start command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). And execute the command-corresponding setting process (step S1212). In the command-corresponding setting process in this case, data is set for executing the effect corresponding to the unit effect on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66.

The effect corresponding to the unit effect starts when the unit effect starts and ends when the unit effect ends. In addition, in the production corresponding to the unit production, the production showing the degree of expectation that the continuous winning result is supported is executed. Specifically, there are multiple types of staging corresponding to the unit staging according to the expectation that it corresponds to the continuous winning result, and when the start command of the unit staging corresponding to the continuous winning result is received. The selection rate of the production with high expectation is high, and the selection rate of the production with low expectation is high when the start command of the unit production corresponding to the continuous loss result is received. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the continuous winning result has occurred before the unit production is completed.

When "1" is set in the unit effect during flag of the main RAM 74, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406 in the continuation chance process, and the unit effect process of step S1418 is executed. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the processing during unit production.

In the unit effect processing, when the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the drive table in this unit effect is completed (step S1601: YES), the rotation drive control prohibition setting is performed (step S1602). .. This prohibits the execution of the stepping motor control process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). In addition, the unit directing flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0".

After that, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the unit effect this time is a unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result (step S1604). ). When the unit effect does not correspond to the continuous winning result (step S1604: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1605). That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect exists in any of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74.

When the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1605: NO), it is necessary to newly execute the unit effect during the continuation chance period of this time. Therefore, similarly to step S1405 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37), the start limit period (for example, 15 sec) is set in the period measurement counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1606). As described above, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

Further, in step S1607, a command corresponding to the result of disconnection is set. The out-of-order result correspondence command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous out-of-order result has ended. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the command corresponding to the disconnection result from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the command-corresponding setting process is executed (step S1212). In the command-corresponding setting process in this case, data is set so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 execute the effect indicating that the unit effect of this time corresponds to the continuous deviation result.

On the other hand, when the value of the hit / fail determination number counter of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1605: YES), the continuation chance period ends without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. means. In this case, the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1608). Further, in step S1609, a continuation chance end command is set. The continuation chance end command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 so as to know that the continuation chance period has ended without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation chance end command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the command-corresponding setting process is executed (step S1212). In the command-corresponding setting process in this case, the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 execute an effect indicating that the continuation chance period has ended without executing the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. Set the data for.

In the unit effect processing, when the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the drive table in this unit effect is completed (step S1601: YES), the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to ". When "1" is set (step S1604: YES), the continuation result corresponding command is set (step S1610). The continuation result correspondence command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 in order to grasp that the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result has been executed. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the continuation result corresponding command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). Then, the command-corresponding setting process is executed (step S1212). In the command-corresponding setting process in this case, data is set so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 execute the effect indicating that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result has been executed.

After that, the ending period (for example, 13 sec) is set in the period measurement counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1611). As described above, the value set in the period measurement counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). After that, it waits in step S1612 until the ending period elapses. When the ending period has elapsed (step S1612: YES), the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0".

With the above configuration, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains in any of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. Even so, this continuation chance period will end. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect is not deleted from the storage areas 101a to 104a, and is carried over to the next execution time of the bonus state. Therefore, a new execution time of the bonus state may be started in a state where the lottery result data is stored and held in the storage areas 101a to 104a, and in this case, the continuous lottery process is executed in the execution time of the bonus state. Even if it is not done, there will be a continuation chance period because there is a carry-over amount of lottery result data. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities for the unit effect to be executed, and it is also possible to increase the probability that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result will be executed.

Here, as already described, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 in the image display device 66 ends when the bonus state ends. As a result, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed in the continuation chance period, the unit effect is executed after the end of the continuation chance period and before the end of the bonus state. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is lottery result data that is not. Further, as already described, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 is started when the bonus state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect in the bonus state in the previous execution time has been carried over to the bonus state in the current execution time. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation for the continuation chance period in the bonus state of the new execution times.

<Cancellation process>
As already explained, during the continuation chance period, the unit effect is basically executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and until the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. , The continuation chance period will continue until the unit production is executed for all the unexecuted lottery result data. Then, in the continuation chance period, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is prevented, so that the continuation chance period is the game. This is the period during which digestion is forcibly blocked. In this case, a player who wants to digest a large number of games at an early stage may find it troublesome to have a continuation chance period. On the other hand, it is possible to end the continuation chance period early based on the operation of the player. The cancelable configuration will be described below.

In the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) of the main MPU 72, when the cancellation operation is performed in a situation where the unit production is not executed and not in the opening period of the continuation chance period (step S1407: YES), the cancellation processing is performed. Execute (step S1419). The operation means for performing the cancel operation is an operation means different from the operation means for performing the start operation of the unit effect, and specifically, the start lever 41 is used. However, the operating means is not limited to the start lever 41, and may be configured such that it is determined that the cancel operation has been performed when any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When the operation means for performing the start operation is an operation means different from the first credit insertion button 47 such as the start lever 41, it is determined that the cancel operation has been performed when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated. It may be configured to be.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a cancellation process. In the cancellation process, first, a cancellation command is set (step S1701). The cancel command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 so as to know that the occurrence of the cancel operation has been effectively accepted during the continuation chance period. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the cancel command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1211 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). The command-corresponding setting process is executed (step S1212). In the command correspondence setting process in this case, the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is performed, the unit effect at the time of canceling the continuation chance period is to be executed from now on, and the unit effect corresponds to a plurality of lottery result data. Data is set so that the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 perform an effect for notifying that the image is being performed.

After that, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed in the same manner as in step S1410 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) (step S1702). As a result, the lottery result data set in the read target bit is read in the storage area on the higher priority side of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. When the lottery result data is read out in the storage area specifying process, it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S1703).

When corresponding to the continuation loss result (step S1703: NO), the counter subtraction process and the storage area shift process are executed and the storage area shift process is executed in the same manner as in step S1416 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) (step S1704). ). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed. After that, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 of the main RAM 74 is “0”. If the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S1702, and if the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1706.

In step S1706, similarly to step S1412 in the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37), the drive table corresponding to the continuation disconnection result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set (step S1706). ). As a result, the movement is started from the standby position to the continuation compatible position, and when the predetermined intermediate position is reached, the movement is performed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction up to that point and the operation is returned to the standby position. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is driven and controlled so as to be. After that, "1" is set in the unit directing flag of the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0" (step S1707).

On the other hand, when the continuous winning result is supported (step S1703: YES), the counter subtraction process and the storage area shift process are executed as in step S1416 in the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) (step S1703: YES). Step S1708). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, a process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data has been read this time is executed.

After that, similarly to step S1414 in the continuous chance processing (FIG. 37), the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is performed (step S1709). As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled so that the operation of starting the movement from the standby position to the continuous support position and reaching the continuous support position is performed. After that, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1710).

If the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the situation where the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit production remains, the lottery result data that is not the execution target is next to the bonus state. The point that it is carried over to the execution times is the same even when the cancel operation is effectively accepted.

Hereinafter, the progress of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is performed in the middle will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41. 41 (a) shows the execution period of the continuation chance period, FIG. 41 (b) shows the execution period of the opening period, FIG. 41 (c) shows the execution period of the start restriction period, and FIG. 41 (d) shows the execution period. The execution period of the unit effect is shown, FIG. 41 (e) shows the execution timing of the cancel operation, and FIG. 41 (f) shows the notification period that the cancel operation is effectively accepted.

At the timing of t1, the continuation chance period starts as shown in FIG. 41 (a). In this case, the opening period is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The cancel operation has not been activated during the opening period. Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved to the standby positions during the opening period as described above, the cancel operation is effective during the opening period, and if the cancel operation is performed, there is an immediate chance to continue. If the period is terminated or the unit effect is started, it is necessary to stop the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement while moving to the standby position. Then, there is a possibility that the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an inconvenience by making the configuration in which the cancel operation is not enabled during the opening period.

After that, when the opening period ends as shown in FIG. 41 (b) at the timing of t2, the first start restriction period starts as shown in FIG. 41 (c). In this start restriction period, the start operation of the unit effect is not performed, and the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is not performed. In this case, the unit effect is started at the timing of t3 when the start restriction period elapses. Since the unit production corresponds to one lottery result data and this lottery result data corresponds to the continuous loss result, the operation contents of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the continuous loss result in the unit production. It becomes the operation content to be performed.

By the way, the cancel operation is not enabled during the execution period of the unit effect. If the cancel operation is effective during the execution period of the unit effect, and the continuation chance period is immediately terminated when the cancel operation is performed, or the unit effect is newly started, the content of the unit effect will be changed. It becomes necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement during the movement of the corresponding operation mode. Then, there is a possibility that the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an inconvenience by configuring the structure so that the cancel operation is not enabled during the execution period of the unit effect.

After that, when the unit production ends at the timing of t4, the start restriction period is newly started as shown in FIG. 41 (c). In this case, the cancel operation is performed as shown in FIG. 41 (e) at the timing of t5, which is the timing before the timing at which the start restriction period elapses. Since the cancel operation is performed during the start restriction period, it is accepted as valid. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the notification for making the player recognize that the cancel operation has been effectively accepted as shown in FIG. 41 (f) is started. Further, at the timing of t5, the unit effect is started as shown in FIG. 41 (d). In this case, if all the lottery result data that are not the execution target of the unit effect correspond to the continuous loss result, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the continuous loss result, that is, the continuous support from the standby position. The movement is started toward the position, and the rotation direction is reversed at the intermediate position before reaching the continuation corresponding position, and the operation of returning to the standby position is performed once. On the other hand, when the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect includes at least one lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result, the operations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the continuous winning result are performed. That is, the operation of starting the movement from the standby position to the continuous support position and stopping at the continuous support position is performed once.

After that, at the timing of t6, the unit effect ends as shown in FIG. 41 (d), and the notification period that the cancel operation is effectively accepted also ends as shown in FIG. 41 (f). Then, the continuation chance period ends at the timing of t7.

<End branch processing>
Next, the end branching process executed in step S1112 in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The end branch process is executed when one execution time in the bonus state ends.

In the end branch processing, when "1" is not set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801: NO), the bonus RT in-progress flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). Further, "1" is set in the bonus output end flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1803). The bonus output end flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output state corresponding to the end of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be set. After that, the bonus end command is set (step S1804). The bonus end command is a command sent to the sub-side MPU 82 to know that the bonus state has ended.

When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the bonus end command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT state counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1215 in the bonus state processing (FIG. 32). .. Then, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not the value of either the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 or the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The remaining ART execution counter is a counter for specifying the remaining execution times in the ART state by the sub-side MPU 82 as described above, and the ART game number counter is a sub for the number of continuous games remaining in one execution time in the ART state. It is a counter for specifying by the side MPU 82. When the values of both the remaining ART execution counter and the ART game number counter are "0" (step S1216: NO), it means that the transitionable condition of the ART state is not satisfied. In this case, the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1217). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the non-AT in-process (step S704) from the next periodic process (FIG. 23), and the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 will return from the first AT state to the non-AT state. In addition, the setting process corresponding to the normal return is executed (step S1218). In the setting process corresponding to the normal return, data setting is performed for the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 to perform an effect indicating that the bonus state ends and the normal game state is returned.

On the other hand, when the value of either the remaining ART execution counter or the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S1216: YES), it means that the transitionable condition of the ART state is satisfied. In this case, "3" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1219). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART preparation state process (step S908) from the next AT in-process process (FIG. 25), and the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 shifts from the first AT state to the second AT state. In addition, the setting process corresponding to ART migration is executed (step S1220). In the setting process corresponding to the ART transition, data setting is performed for the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 to perform an effect indicating that the bonus state ends and the ART state is shifted.

Returning to the explanation of the end branch processing (FIG. 40), in the end branch processing, when "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1801: YES), the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 ends. “20” corresponding to the reference number of times is set (step S1805). As a result, the number of end reference games for the new execution times in the bonus state is set. Further, "1" is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1806). As already described, the bonus output start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the external output state corresponding to the start of the bonus RT mode ST5 should be set. After that, the bonus continuation command is set (step S1807). The bonus continuation command is a command transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82 so that when one execution time in the bonus state is completed, the next execution time in the bonus state is executed as it is.

When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the bonus continuation command from the main-side MPU 72, if the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "2", the sub-side MPU 82 makes an affirmative determination in step S1213 in the bonus status processing (FIG. 32). Then, the setting process for continuation support in step S1214 is executed. In the continuous support setting process, data is set for executing the effect indicating that a new execution time of the bonus state is started on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66.

As described above, when the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5, so that the control state of the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes a bonus. It becomes a state. In the bonus state, the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) is executed in the main MPU 72, and the bonus state process (FIG. 32) is executed in the sub MPU 82. As a result, the state in which the replay probability is higher than in the normal game state and the expected number of medals per unit game is increased continues over a plurality of games, which is advantageous for the player.

In the bonus state, if the winner is any of IV = 7 to 10, the continuous lottery process is executed, and if the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result, the new execution times of the bonus state are executed. The condition for starting is satisfied. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the winning result will be continuously generated in the bonus state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the continuous lottery process is executed when the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the main MPU 72 results in winning at any of IV = 7 to 10, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are executed. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not IV = 7 to 10 has been won from the stop mode, it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of continuous winning results in relation to the stop mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It will be possible. In addition, the probabilities of continuous winning results are different in each of IV = 7 to 10. From this point as well, it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of continuous winning results in relation to the stopping mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

At the timing when the continuous lottery process is executed, the lottery result is not notified to the player, and the result of the continuous lottery process is collectively notified during the continuous chance period generated in the final game in the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the period in which the result of the continuous lottery process is notified into the continuation chance period, and it is possible to generate a period in which the attention of the player who expects the continuous winning result to be generated increases.

Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to expect the player to execute the continuous lottery process until the continuation chance period starts and that the result of the continuous lottery process will be the continuous winning result, and continue. Since it is possible to expect that the notification indicating that the winning result is continuously executed is executed during the chance period, it is possible to change the target that the player pays attention to in the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the bonus state.

During the continuation chance period, a unit effect for notifying the result of the continuous lottery process is executed, and the unit effect is executed in a one-to-one correspondence with one result of the continuous lottery process. That is, instead of executing one unit effect for all the results of the continuous lottery process that occurred before the continuation chance period occurs, each result of the continuous lottery process is individually notified as a unit effect. To. Further, the unit effect is not executed only when the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result, but the unit effect is executed even when the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous loss result. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the unit effect, and it is possible to give many opportunities to increase the degree of attention to the game by using the unit effect.

In the configuration in which the results of the continuous lottery process are collectively notified in the continuous chance period, the number of lottery result data of the continuous lottery process that is not the target of execution of the unit effect is the period before the continuous chance period and the continuation in the bonus state. It is displayed on the image display device 66 as the number-of-times notification image G1 in both of the chance periods. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the number of executions of the unit effect to be executed in the future, and it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player.

In the configuration in which the probability of a continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is different for each of IV = 7 to 10, the number of lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect in the number notification image G1 is IV = 7 to. Each of the 10 is displayed separately. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the lottery result data having a high probability of being a continuous winning result will be acquired, and the number of lottery result data having a high probability of being a continuous winning result is 1 or more. In that case, it is expected that the unit effect for the lottery result data will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the configuration where the probability of a continuous winning result in the continuous lottery process is different for each of IV = 7 to 10, the unit production is prioritized from the lottery result data having a high probability of a continuous winning result during the continuous chance period. It becomes the execution target. As a result, it becomes possible to facilitate the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result at an early stage in the continuous chance period, and the continuous period of the continuous chance period in which the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed is long. It is possible to reduce the probability that the period will be extended.

In the continuation chance period, the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process executed with the same winning combination as the trigger of IV = 7 to 10 is subject to the execution of the unit effect according to the order in which the lottery result data is acquired. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is compared with the configuration in which the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is preferentially executed and the configuration in which the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed preferentially. It is possible to make the execution timing irregular, and it is possible to expect the player for each of the unit effects.

In a configuration in which the results of the continuous lottery process are collectively notified during the continuous chance period that occurs in the final game in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is executed in the game in which any of IV = 7 to 10 is won in the bonus state. .. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load compared to the configuration in which the continuous lottery processing is collectively executed during the continuation chance period, and the processing load increases locally and the processing waiting time during the continuation chance period becomes longer. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

When the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, even if the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect remains in any of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74, this continuation chance period Will be terminated. In this case, the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect is not deleted from the storage areas 101a to 104a, and is carried over to the next execution time of the bonus state. Therefore, a new execution time of the bonus state may be started in a state where the lottery result data is stored and held in the storage areas 101a to 104a, and in this case, the continuous lottery process is executed in the execution time of the bonus state. Even if it is not done, there will be a continuation chance period because there is a carry-over amount of lottery result data. As a result, it is possible to give many opportunities for the unit effect to be executed, and it is also possible to increase the probability that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result will be executed.

The display of the number-of-times notification image G1 in the image display device 66 ends when the bonus state ends. As a result, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is executed in the continuation chance period, the unit effect is executed after the end of the continuation chance period and before the end of the bonus state. It is possible to make the player recognize that there is lottery result data that is not. Further, as already described, the display of the number-of-times notification image G1 is started when the bonus state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result data that is not the execution target of the unit effect in the bonus state in the previous execution time has been carried over to the bonus state in the current execution time. This makes it possible to suitably increase the expectation for the continuation chance period in the bonus state of the new execution times.

The unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the unit effect by using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for clearly indicating the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in each game.

When the unit effect is completed, the result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the current unit effect is notified by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R after the variation display. As a result, in a configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the end timing of one execution time of the unit effect and the result of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the unit effect of each execution time are clarified to the player. Can be recognized by.

The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect is started based on the start operation of the player, and is also started when the start restriction period elapses without executing the start operation. By starting the unit effect when the start operation is executed by the player, it is possible to start the unit effect by the active operation by the player. Further, by forcibly starting the unit staging when the start restriction period has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the continuation chance period from becoming excessively long.

The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production stops regardless of the player's operation. As a result, the processing configuration for executing the unit effect is simplified, and the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the end of the unit effect is set as the stop result corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process. The control is facilitated.

In the unit effect, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R operate in a mode different from the operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the drive control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. As a result, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It is possible to make the player recognize the movement clearly different from the movement of.

In the unit effect, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R move in the rotation direction at a speed slower than the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the drive control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. do. As a result, the player who is accustomed to the rotation speed corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) can clearly recognize the difference when the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production is confirmed. Will be.

In the continuation chance period, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged in the standby position, and in the unit production, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R move from the standby position toward the continuation corresponding position to correspond to the continuation disengagement result. In the case of unit production, the rotation direction is reversed and returns to the standby position in the middle position before reaching the continuous support position, whereas in the case of unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result, the continuous support position is reached. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous loss result and the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result are different from each other in the final operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to standardize the starting mode of the unit effect regardless of the unit effect corresponding to the result, and it is possible to expect the player to generate a continuous winning result at each execution time of the unit effect.

The amount of movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the continuous support position is one frame until the "BAR" symbol existing in the upper or lower stage moves to the middle stage. In addition, the amount of movement until the rotation direction is reversed and the standby position is returned to the standby position before reaching the continuation corresponding position in the continuous disconnection result is also one frame or less. This reduces the time required to execute one unit effect in a configuration in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a speed at which the type of moving symbol can be clearly recognized in the unit effect. It is possible to plan.

When the continuation chance period is started, the opening period for notifying the player that the continuation chance period is started is started. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R move to the standby position by the end of the opening period. This makes it possible to move each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the standby position using the opening period.

The opening period is set as a fixed period, and the maximum period assumed as the period required for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to move to the standby position is equal to or less than the opening period. As a result, in a configuration that simplifies the processing configuration for setting the end trigger of the opening period and specifying the end trigger by setting the opening period to a fixed period, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are within the range of the opening period. It is possible to adjust the stop position of the to the standby position.

During the continuation chance period, the reels 32L and 32M are executed after the game start condition is satisfied and the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, and then the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is executed. , 32R occurs during the period when the start of rotation is blocked. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the unit production performed during the continuation chance period. In this case, the continuation period of each unit effect is not adjusted according to the number of executions of the unit effect within the range where the continuation period of the continuation chance period is fixed, or the number of executions of the unit effect is not adjusted. The duration of the continuation chance period changes according to the number of executions of. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is increased with respect to the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period.

If it is decided to start a new unit production, the duration of the continuation chance period will be extended, so at the start of the continuation chance period, the entire duration of this continuation chance period can be calculated, or the continuation of this time can be calculated. There is no need to specify the end timing of the chance period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the continuation chance period.

During the continuation chance period, the reels 32L and 32M are executed after the game start condition is satisfied and the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, and then the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is executed. , 32R occurs during the period when the start of rotation is blocked. In this case, after the continuation chance period ends, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, is started. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the continuation chance period has expired. Further, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is compared with the configuration in which the continuation chance period is started during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the above.

The continuation chance period occurs in the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. Further, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect becomes the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result, and then the bonus state is newly added. Execution times are started. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed as the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R immediately before the start of the new execution time of the bonus state, so that the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the display corresponds to the start of a new execution time of the bonus state.

In the continuation chance period, the unit effect is basically executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and in the continuation chance period, the stop control corresponding to the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is performed. In a configuration in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be executed is prevented, when the cancel operation is executed by the player, the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period is reduced. Will be done. This makes it possible to prevent the number of unit staging performed during the continuation chance period from becoming unnecessarily large. Further, even if the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period is reduced, the number of executions of the continuous lottery process and the result of the continuous lottery process are not affected, so that the player's profit is not lost. It is possible to prevent the number of unit productions performed during the chance period from becoming unnecessarily large.

When the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period is reduced based on the cancel operation, the continuation period of the continuation chance period is shortened accordingly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the duration of the continuation chance period from being fixed as it is even though the number of executions of the unit effect is reduced.

Based on the cancellation operation performed by the player, the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period is reduced. As a result, the player who wants to digest a large number of games at an early stage can shorten the duration of the continuation chance period, and the continuation chance period is forcibly continued, which makes the player feel annoyed. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

When the cancel operation is performed, in the situation where no lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included, the unit corresponding to the continuous loss result as a unit effect corresponding to all the remaining lottery result data. In the situation where the production is executed once, the continuation chance period ends, and the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included, each lottery result data up to the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is supported. As a unit effect, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed once, and the continuation chance period ends. As a result, even if the cancel operation is performed, it is possible to notify the player by executing the unit effect whether or not a new execution time of the bonus state occurs. On the other hand, when the cancel operation is performed, the unit effect is executed only once and the continuation chance period ends, so that the continuation chance period can be terminated early.

The cancel operation is not activated during the opening period of the continuation chance period. Since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are moved to the standby positions during the opening period, the cancel operation is effective in the opening period, and if the cancel operation is further performed, the continuation chance period is immediately terminated. Assuming that the configuration or the configuration for starting the unit effect, it is necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement while moving to the standby position. Then, there is a possibility that the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an inconvenience by making the configuration in which the cancel operation is not enabled during the opening period.

The cancel operation is enabled during the start restriction period before the unit effect is started, and is not activated during the unit effect execution period. If the cancel operation is effective during the execution period of the unit effect, and the continuation chance period is immediately terminated when the cancel operation is performed, or the unit effect is newly started, the content of the unit effect will be changed. It becomes necessary to stop the movement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R or start a new movement during the movement of the corresponding operation mode. Then, there is a possibility that the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R cannot be performed satisfactorily. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an inconvenience by configuring the structure so that the cancel operation is not enabled during the execution period of the unit effect.

Here, when the player stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order corresponding to the penalty event even though the sub-side MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the condition for transition to the bonus state is not satisfied. In some circumstances, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 may shift to the bonus RT mode ST5. In this case, when the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5, step S1102 or later in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) is performed regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the bonus state is satisfied. Since the process of is executed, the control for the bonus state is executed. On the other hand, in the sub-side MPU 82, the bonus state processing (FIG. 32) is not executed even if the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs in a situation where the condition for transition to the bonus state is not satisfied. Therefore, even if the control for the bonus state is executed in the main MPU 72, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the bell prize when winning any of IV = 1 to 6 is Not notified. Further, even if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is won, the stop order for avoiding the first fall replay winning is not notified, so from the bonus RT mode ST5. The transition of the lottery mode to the normal mode ST1 occurs at an early stage. Therefore, even if the control for the bonus state is executed by the main MPU 72 in the situation where the condition for transition to the bonus state is not satisfied, it is possible to prevent the profit of the bonus state from being given to the player. Become.

Further, the main MPU 72 does not always execute the continuous lottery process when any of IV = 7 to 10 is won in the situation where the process after step S1104 in the bonus RT management process is being executed, but is a lottery. The continuous lottery process is executed only when the mode is the bonus RT mode ST5 and the winner is any of IV = 7 to 10. Then, as described above, in the situation where the bonus state processing (FIG. 32) is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the stop order for avoiding the first fall replay winning is not notified, so that the control for the bonus state is executed in the main-side MPU 72. Even so, it is considered that the transition of the lottery mode from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1 occurs at an early stage. Therefore, the possibility that a continuation chance period will occur when the control for the bonus state is executed by the main MPU 72 in a situation other than the bonus state is reduced.

<ART preparation status processing>
Next, the ART preparation state process executed in step S908 of the AT in-process process (FIG. 25) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described.

The ART preparation state is a state in which, when the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the user stays before the transition to the ART state. In the ART preparation state, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to enable the establishment of the bell prize when winning in any of IV = 1 to 2 on condition that the preparation is not in the penalty state. Is notified, and even if the player wins at any of IV = 3 to 6, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for enabling the establishment of the bell prize is not notified. Further, in the ART preparation state, when either IV = 15 to 18 (hereinafter, also referred to as a promotion target combination) in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) or the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is won. Is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop order for promotion generation). This state is the second AT state of the sub-side MPU 82 already described, as in the case of the bonus preparation state. To shift to the ART state, in the situation where the ART preparation state process or the ART end branch process is being executed on the sub-side MPU82, the reel 32L is won in the promotion target combination in the first RT mode ST2 and is stopped in the order of stop for promotion. , 32M, 32R is stopped and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing ART preparation state processing. In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether or not a penalty event during the ART preparation state has occurred (step S1901). For the penalty event during the ART preparation state, either IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). It is included that either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize was established. In the ART preparation state, even if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination in the main MPU 72 becomes each of the above lottery results, the stop order for shifting the lottery mode is not notified. Then, each of the above winning results for shifting the lottery mode does not occur unless the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. That is, each of the above events is an event that occurs when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop even though the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. The event is set as a penalty event during the ART preparation state.

In addition, the penalty event during the ART preparation state includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were not stopped in the stop order for promotion generation when the promotion target combination was won. In the ART preparation state, if the promotion target combination is won, the stop order for promotion generation is notified on the image display device 66, but the promotion generation generation is performed even though the notification is executed. An event in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order is a penalty event during the ART preparation state.

When a penalty event during the ART preparation state has occurred (step S1901: YES), "1" is set in the preparation penalty flag of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1902). As described above, the preparing penalty flag is a flag for specifying on the sub-side MPU 82 that a penalty event has occurred during the bonus preparation state or the ART preparation state. The preparing penalty flag is cleared to "0" when shifting from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

In the ART preparation state processing, when a lottery result command indicating that the winner is won in either IV = 1 or 2 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1903: YES), the preparation penalty flag of the sub RAM 84 is received. On condition that "1" is not set in (step S1904: NO), the stop order setting process for winning a bell is executed (step S1905). In the stop order setting process for the bell prize, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning order. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning in this way, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning when the IV = 1 to 2 is won in the bonus preparation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected number of medals to be obtained per unit game in the bonus preparation state as compared with the normal game state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is not executed.

In the ART preparation state process, in step S1906, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the specific target combination has been won has been received from the main MPU 72. The specific target combinations are IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14, 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). IV = 11 to 21 in FIG. 18) and IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20).

When the lottery result command indicating that the specific target combination has been won has been received (step S1906: YES), the stop order setting process for the specific target combination is executed (step S1907). In the stop order setting process for the specific target combination, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14, 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the first. If any of IV = 11 to 15 in the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the normal replay winning. In these cases, the stop operation to enable the normal replay winning is established by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize in this way, it is possible to avoid the transition to the additional RT mode ST4 or the bonus RT mode ST5, and from the first RT mode ST2. It is possible to avoid the transition to the normal mode ST1.

In the stop order setting process for the specific target role, if any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) is won, the second fall replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order of. In this case, in order to enable the establishment of the second fall replay prize by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the stop order is started. While it is assumed that the lottery mode shifts to the ART preparation state in the situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3, the transition to the ART state is when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in the ART preparation state. Occurs in. Then, when the state shifts to the ART preparation state in the second RT mode ST3, it is necessary to temporarily shift the lottery mode to the first RT mode ST2 in order to generate the transition to the ART state. Therefore, in the situation where any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) is won, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the second fall replay prize is notified. , The transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 can be positively caused.

In the stop order setting process for the specific target role, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (Fig. 20) is won, the first fall replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order of. In this case, in order to enable the establishment of the first fall replay prize by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the stop order is started. While it is assumed that the lottery mode shifts to the ART preparation state in the bonus RT mode ST5, the transition to the ART state is when the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 in the ART preparation state. Occurs in. Then, when the bonus RT mode ST5 shifts to the ART preparation state, it is necessary to temporarily shift the lottery mode to the normal mode ST1 in order to generate an opportunity to shift to the ART state. Therefore, in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is won, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the first fall replay prize is notified. , It becomes possible to positively cause the transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

In the ART preparation status process, when a lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1908: YES), the stop order setting process for promoting promotion is executed (step). S1909). In the stop order setting process for promotion occurrence, data setting for notifying the stop order for promotion occurrence is performed. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the notification of the stop order for promotion generation is started. The image display device 66 is displayed and controlled. By notifying the stop order for promotion generation in this way, it is possible to establish the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize when the promotion target combination is won in the ART preparation state.

In the ART preparation state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the player has won in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1910: YES), the preparation penalty flag of the sub RAM 84 is received. On the condition that "1" is not set in (step S1911: NO), the lottery process for adding the number of initial continuous games is executed (step S1912). In the lottery process for adding the number of initial continuous games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state when the ART preparation state is changed to the ART state, and if it is added, the number of additional games is determined. do. In the additional lottery process for the number of initial continuous games, the additional lottery table for the number of initial continuous games corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub-side RAM 84. The value of the sub-side lottery counter is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the additional lottery table for the number of initial continuous games. In the additional lottery table for the number of initial continuous games, there is a high probability that additional games will occur in the order of IV = 7 → IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10, and the number of additional games expected to be acquired is large in that order. It is set to be. When the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is won (step S1913: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the initial additional counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1913: YES). Step S1914). The initial addition counter is a counter for specifying the addition amount of the number of continuous games in the ART state when the state shifts to the ART state by the sub-side MPU 82.

In the ART preparation state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game has won IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1915: YES), on condition that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion generation (step S1916: YES), "4" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S1917). .. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART state processing (step S909) described later in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Then, on condition that the value of the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0" (step S1918: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1919).

<ART state processing>
Next, the ART state processing executed in step S909 of the AT in-process processing (FIG. 25) in the sub-side MPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the ART state processing, it is determined whether or not the current processing time is the processing time immediately after the transition from the ART preparation state or the ART end branch state to the ART state, so that the current processing time is the start timing of the ART state. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2001). When it is the start timing of the ART state (step S2001: YES), the set process to the ART game number counter is executed (step S2002).

In the setting process to the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, the value of the initial addition counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. As a result, when the game shifts to the bonus state in the middle of the ART state and then shifts to the ART state again after the end of the bonus state, the number of continuous games remaining in the execution times of the ART state that was in the middle of the execution is The additional amount of the number of continuous games generated in the ART preparation state is added. On the other hand, in the setting process to the ART game number counter, if the value of the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0", after setting the initial continuous game number "50" to the ART game number counter, The value of the initial addition counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is added to the value of the ART game number counter. As a result, when one execution time in the ART state is newly started, an additional amount of the number of continuous games generated in the ART preparation state is added to the initial number of continuous games in one execution time in the ART state.

In the ART state processing, when the lottery result command indicating that the winning is achieved in any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2003: YES), the stop order setting processing for the bell winning is performed. Execute (step S2004). In the stop order setting process for the bell prize, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning order. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning in this way, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning when the IV = 1 to 6 is won in the ART state. Therefore, the expected number of medals per unit game in the ART state is belled only when the normal game state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize is not executed and IV = 1 to 2 is won. It is possible to raise the stop order for establishing a prize higher than the ART preparation state in which the notification is notified. It should be noted that the state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning is notified when the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in this way is the same as in the case of the bonus state, the first AT of the sub-side MPU 82. It is a state.

In the ART state processing, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the special target combination has been won has been received from the main MPU 72. The special target combinations are IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14, 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). IV = 11-14, 16-21 in FIG. 18), and IV = 11-16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20).

When the lottery result command indicating that the special target combination has been won has been received (step S2005: YES), the stop order setting process for the special target combination is executed (step S2006). In the stop order setting process for the special target combination, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14, 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the first. If any of IV = 11-14 and 16-21 in the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is won, the data setting for notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize. I do. In these cases, the stop operation to enable the normal replay winning is established by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize in this way, it is possible to avoid the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5, and it is possible to avoid the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2. And the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 can be avoided.

In the stop order setting process for the special target role, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (Fig. 20) is won, the first fall replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order of. In this case, in order to enable the establishment of the first fall replay prize by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the stop order is started. In the ART state, the stop order for avoiding the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 will be notified, but in the situation where the bonus trigger response role is won due to an operation error of the player, etc., the stop order for the bonus trigger response is used. It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be stopped. On the other hand, by positively notifying the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is won. It is possible to positively cause a transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

In the ART state processing, when the lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2007: YES), the stop order setting process for the promotion occurrence is executed (step S2008). In the stop order setting process for promotion occurrence, data is set to notify the stop order for promotion occurrence. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the notification of the stop order for promotion generation is started. The image display device 66 is displayed and controlled. By notifying the stop order for the promotion to occur in this way, it is possible to establish the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize when the promotion target combination is won in the ART state. The process of step S2008 is executed in the ART state when the lottery mode falls to the first RT mode ST2 or the normal mode ST1 in the ART state, and then the promotion target combination is won.

In the ART state processing, when a lottery result command indicating that the game has been won in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2009: YES), the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games is executed. (Step S2010). In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games, the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub is periodically updated (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) in the sub-side RAM 84. The value of the side lottery counter is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games. In the additional lottery table for the number of continuous games, there is a high probability that additional games will occur in the order of IV = 7 → IV = 8 → IV = 9 → IV = 10, and the expected number of additional games will increase in that order. Is set to. When the additional game number is added and won in the additional lottery process (step S2011: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2012). ..

In the ART state processing, when the lottery result command indicating that the winner is won at IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2013: YES), the addition is transferred. The stop order setting process of is executed (step S2014). In the stop order setting process for the addition transfer, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize. As a result, either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is awarded by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the above is started. By notifying the stop order in this way, it is possible to establish either the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize.

In the ART state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won in any of IV = 7 to 10 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2015 and step S2016: YES), a bonus generation lottery is performed. The process is executed (step S2017). In the bonus generation lottery process, the bonus generation lottery table corresponding to each of IV = 7 to 10 is read from the sub side ROM 83, and the value of the sub side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) in the sub side RAM 84. Is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the bonus generation lottery table. In the bonus generation lottery table, if you win at IV = 7, there is a 5% chance that you will win a bonus, and if you win at IV = 8, you will have a 10% chance of winning a bonus, IV = If you win at 9, you have a 15% chance of winning a bonus, and if you win at IV = 10, you have a 20% chance of winning a bonus. When the bonus generation is won in the bonus generation lottery process (step S2018: YES), "1" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2019). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the bonus preparation state processing (step S906) already described in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART state to the bonus preparation state. In this case, the value of the ART game number counter and the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 are held as they are without being cleared to "0".

In the ART state processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won at IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2015 and step S2020: YES), provided that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order that enables either the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning (step S2021: YES). “6” is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2022). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the addition state processing (step S911) in the next AT in-process (FIG. 25), and the gaming state will shift from the ART state to the addition state. In this case, the value of the ART game number counter and the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 are held as they are without being cleared to "0".

In the additional RT mode lottery table, as already explained, only IV = 1 to 10 are set as winning combinations. The same winning data as the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11) is set in IV = 1 to 10. In this case, each winning probability of IV = 1 to 7 is the same as in the case of the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). On the other hand, each winning probability of IV = 8 to 10 is set higher than the winning probability of the corresponding IV value in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). Specifically, in the additional RT mode ST4, only IV = 8 to 10 can win a replay prize, and the probability of winning in any of IV = 8 to 10 is set to about 1 / 2.5. ing. As a result, in the additional RT mode ST4, the probability that the bell replay prize, the first cherry replay prize, and the second cherry replay prize will be established increases.

In the addition state processing (step S911) during the AT process (FIG. 25), if any of IV = 7 to 10 is won, the addition of the number of continuous games in the ART state is surely generated. In this case, the number of additional games is determined by lottery. In the lottery, the expected number of games to be acquired is different for each of IV = 7 to 10. Then, the number of games determined by the lottery is added to the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84. In the additional state processing, "20" is set as the number of continuous games in the additional state at the start, and the value of the set number of continuous games is subtracted by 1 each time a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72. Then, when the value of the number of continuous games becomes "0", "4" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84. As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART state processing (step S909) in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the added state to the ART state.

In the ART state processing (FIG. 44), a winning result command indicating that the game is not a winning game at IV = 7 to 10, 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72. In the case (step S2020: NO), a bonus is received even when a winning result command indicating that the game is won at IV = 7 to 10 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) is received from the main MPU 72. Mainly the winning result command indicating that the game is won at IV = 15 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) or when the bonus is not won in the generated lottery process (step S2018: NO). If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the stop order for addition transfer when received from the side MPU 72 (step S2021: NO), the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2023, the value of the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S2024: YES), "5" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2025). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART end branch process (step S910) in the next AT in-process (FIG. 25), and the game state will shift from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

<ART end branch processing>
The ART end branch state is a gaming state in which one stays when one execution of the ART state is completed. In the ART end branch state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped to enable the establishment of the bell prize when winning any of IV = 1 to 6 on condition that the branching penalty state is not applied. The order is notified. Further, in the ART end branch state, if the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, it finally returns to the ART state, and if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", it is finally returned to the ART state. The sub-side MPU 82 shifts to the normal gaming state in which the non-AT state is set. Here, since the ART end branch state is entered when one execution of the ART state is completed, there is a high possibility that the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 at the timing of the transition to the ART end branch state. In this case, even if the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is once generated, and then the transition to the second RT mode ST3 is performed again. A new execution of the ART state is started.

The state in which the ART end branch state is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 45 (a) shows the execution period of the ART state, FIG. 45 (b) shows the execution period of the ART end branch state, and FIG. 45 (c) shows the execution period of the second RT mode ST3, FIG. 45 (d). ) Shows the execution period of the first RT mode ST2, FIG. 45 (e) shows the execution period of the normal mode ST1, and FIG. 45 (f) shows the period during which the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. FIG. 45 (g) shows the games that have won the promotion target combination (IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for first RT mode (FIG. 16)). The execution period is shown, and FIG. 45 (h) shows the fall target combination (IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) and IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18)). FIG. 45 (i) shows the execution period of the winning game, FIG. 45 (i) shows the execution period of the game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won, and FIG. 45 (j) shows the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Indicates the period during which the stop order is notified.

First, the ART end branch state shifted in the situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is “0” will be described.

At the timing of t1, one execution of the ART state ends as shown in FIG. 45 (a), and the ART end branch state starts as shown in FIG. 45 (b). In this case, the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won is started. In this case, the winner is IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). If the player wins at IV = 22, the normal replay prize will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Here, in the ART end branch processing, when the winning combination in which the normal replay prize is established is won in the first RT mode ST2 or the second RT mode ST3 regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop order for the effect is set. A lottery process for stop order notification is executed to determine whether or not to execute the notification. Then, when the notification is won in the lottery process of the stop order notification, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. The probability of winning the notification differs depending on the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more than when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0". The probability of winning the notification is set higher. In the game started at the timing of t1, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified as shown in FIG. 45 (j) because the notification is not won in the lottery process of the stop order notification.

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game in which the fall target combination is won is started. In this case, since the lottery mode is still the second RT mode ST3, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the establishment of the second fall replay prize that triggers the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is avoided. The stop order for is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t3. In this case, since the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d).

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the game in which the promotion target combination is won is started. In this case, since the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is “0” as shown in FIG. 45 (f), from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. 45 (j). The stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning, which is the trigger for the transition, is not notified. Therefore, in this game, the second RT replay winning is not established, and the first RT mode ST2 continues as the lottery mode as shown in FIG. 45 (d).

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game in which the fall target combination is won is started. As shown in FIG. 45 (f), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 is triggered. The stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t6. In this case, since the first fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1 as shown in FIGS. 45 (d) and 45 (e). As a result, the game state shifts from the ART end branch state to the normal game state.

Next, the ART end branch state shifted in the situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more will be described.

At the timing of t7, one execution of the ART state ends as shown in FIG. 45 (a), and the ART end branch state starts as shown in FIG. 45 (b). In this case, the lottery mode is the second RT mode ST3 as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Further, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won is started. In the game, the player wins at IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). That is, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the winning combination is that the normal replay winning is established. In this case, as already explained, the lottery process for notifying the stop order is executed, and this time the notification is won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the notification of the stop order determined by the lottery process of the stop order notification is started at the timing of t7. It should be noted that the normal replay winning is established regardless of whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order.

After that, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game in which the fall target combination is won is started. In this case, since the lottery mode is still the second RT mode ST3, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the establishment of the second fall replay prize that triggers the transition from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is avoided. The stop order for is not notified. The game ends at the timing of t9. In this case, since the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d).

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won is started. In the game, the winner is IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 18). In this case, the lottery process for notifying the stop order is executed as described above, but this time the notification is not won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 45 (h), the game in which the fall target combination is won is started. As shown in FIG. 45 (f), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), it serves as an opportunity to shift from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1. The stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay prize is notified. Therefore, in the game, the establishment of the first fall replay winning is avoided, and the first RT mode ST2 is continued as shown in FIG. 45 (d).

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 45 (i), a game in which neither the promotion target combination nor the fall target combination is won is started. In the game, the winner is one of IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 18). This applicable role is a bonus opportunity response role. In the bonus end branch state, if the bonus opportunity corresponding role is won, the stop order for preventing the first special replay prize and the second special replay prize from being established, in other words, for establishing the normal replay prize. The stop order is notified. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (j), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. In this case, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the notified stop order, the establishment of the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning is avoided, and the normal replay winning is established.

By the way, when the bonus trigger corresponding role is won in the bonus end branch state, the first special replay prize and the second special replay are won regardless of whether the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. The stop order for avoiding the winning is notified. The probability that the stop order will be notified in this situation is constant regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the game in which the promotion target combination is won is started. In this case, since the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 45 (f), the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3 is changed as shown in FIG. 45 (j). The stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning, which is the trigger for the transition, is notified. Then, by stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the stop order, the lottery mode is set as shown in FIGS. 45 (c) and 45 (d) at the timing of t14, which is the timing at which the game ends. The first RT mode ST2 shifts to the second RT mode ST3, and as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the ART end branch state ends and a new execution time of the ART state is started. Further, at the timing of t14, the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 as shown in FIG. 45 (f).

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an ART end branch process executed in step S910 in the AT process (FIG. 25). In the ART end branch processing, it is determined whether or not a penalty event during the ART end branch state has occurred (step S2101). For the penalty event during the ART end branch state, either IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), or the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). It is included that either the 1st special replay prize or the 2nd special replay prize was established.

Further, for the penalty event during the ART end branch state, the promotion target combination (IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16)). It is included that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were not stopped in the stop order for promotion generation even though the stop order for promotion generation was notified in the case of winning in. Further, in the penalty event during the ART end branch state, the stop order for promotion occurrence is not notified when the winner is won at IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). However, it includes that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order for promotion generation. Further, in the penalty event during the ART end branch state, the stop order for avoiding a fall is notified when any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is won. Nevertheless, it includes that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for the fall occurrence.

When a penalty event during the ART end branch state has occurred (step S2101: YES), "1" is set in the branching penalty flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 (step S2102). The branching penalty flag is a flag for the sub-side MPU 82 to specify that a penalty event has occurred during the ART end branching state. The branching penalty flag is cleared to "0" when the ART end branch state ends.

In the ART end branch process, the stop order notification process is executed in step S2103. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop order notification process. In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), a penalty during branching of the sub RAM 84 is received. On condition that "1" is not set in the flag (step S2202: NO), the stop order setting process for winning the bell is executed (step S2203). In the stop order setting process for the bell prize, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize. As a result, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning order. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell winning in this way, it becomes possible to establish the bell winning at the time of winning IV = 1 to 6 in the ART end branch state. Therefore, when the expected number of medals per unit game in the ART end branch state is won in the normal game state in which the notification of the stop order for enabling the establishment of the bell prize is not executed and IV = 1 to 2 is won. It is possible to raise the stop order for establishing the only bell prize higher than the bonus preparation state and the ART preparation state in which the stop order is notified. It should be noted that the first AT state of the sub-side MPU 82 is a state in which the stop order for establishing the bell winning is notified when the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in this way.

In the stop order notification process, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the predetermined target combination has been won has been received from the main MPU 72. The predetermined target combinations are IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). IV = 11 to 15, and IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20).

When the lottery result command indicating that the predetermined target combination has been won is received (step S2204: YES), the stop order setting process for the predetermined target combination is executed (step S2205). In the stop order setting process for the predetermined target combination, IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16), and lottery for the second RT mode. If any of IV = 11 to 15 in the table (FIG. 18) is won, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize. In these cases, the stop operation to enable the normal replay winning is established by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize in this way, it is possible to avoid the transition to the additional RT mode ST4 and the bonus RT mode ST5.

In the stop order setting process for the predetermined target role, if any of IV = 11 to 16 in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) is won, the first fall replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order of. In this case, in order to enable the establishment of the first fall replay prize by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the stop order is started. In the ART end branch state, the stop order for avoiding the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 will be notified, but the bonus trigger response will be stopped when the player wins the bonus trigger response role due to an operation error of the player or the like. It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in order. On the other hand, by positively notifying the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize in the situation where any of IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for bonus RT mode (FIG. 20) is won. It is possible to positively cause a transition from the bonus RT mode ST5 to the normal mode ST1.

In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18) has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2206: YES). ), The setting process for the fall trigger is executed (step S2207). In the setting process for the fall trigger, data is set for executing the effect corresponding to winning any of IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode ST3. In this case, the lottery mode may fall in the current game by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the suggestive effect is started. At the time of the effect, the notification of the stop order such as the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize and the stop order for establishing the second fall replay prize is not executed. In this case, the player predicts the stop order for preventing the second fall replay winning, and stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the predicted order. Even if the establishment of the second fall replay prize is avoided in the game, it does not correspond to the penalty event in the ART end branch state, and similarly, even if the second fall replay prize is established in the game, the ART end branch state is established. It does not correspond to the penalty event in. By avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize, the second RT mode ST3 will be continued, and if the replay probability is high and the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6, the bell prize will be established. It is possible to continue the state in which the stop order is notified.

In the stop order notification process, when a lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2208: YES). ), The setting process for the fall trigger is executed on condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0" (step S2209: NO) (step S2210). In the setting process for the fall trigger, data is set for executing the effect corresponding to winning any of IV = 19 to 24 in the first RT mode ST2. In this case, the lottery mode may fall in the current game by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the suggestive effect is started. At the time of the effect, the notification of the stop order such as the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay prize and the stop order for establishing the first fall replay prize is not executed. In this case, the player predicts the stop order for preventing the first fall replay winning, and stops the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the predicted order. Even if the establishment of the first fall replay prize is avoided in the game, it does not correspond to the penalty event in the ART end branch state, and similarly, even if the first fall replay prize is established in the game, the ART end branch state is established. It does not correspond to the penalty event in. By avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay prize, the first RT mode ST2 will be continued, and if the replay probability is high and the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6, the bell prize will be established. It is possible to continue the state in which the stop order is notified.

On the other hand, there is a case where a lottery result command indicating that any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) has been won is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2208: YES). When the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2209: YES), the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall is executed. In the stop order setting process for avoiding a fall, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of a normal replay prize. In this case, the stop order for enabling the normal replay prize to be established until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the above is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning in this way, it is possible to avoid the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the normal mode ST1.

In the stop order notification process, in step S2212, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won has been received from the main MPU 72. The promotion target combinations are IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11) and IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for first RT mode (FIG. 16).

When the lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won is received (step S2212: YES), the condition is that the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2213: YES). , The stop order setting process for promotion occurrence is executed (step S2214). In the stop order setting process for promotion generation, if any of IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11) is won, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay prize. Set the data to notify. In this case, until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the stop for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay prize. The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the first RT replay winning in this way, it is possible to shift from the normal mode ST1 to the first RT mode ST2.

In addition, in the situation where the stop order setting process for promotion generation is executed when any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11) is won, for example, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is set. When the number is 1 or more and the first RT mode is ST2, the reels 32L, 32M, have a stop order different from the stop order even though the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the first fall replay winning is notified. It occurs when 32R is stopped and the first fall replay prize is established.

Further, in the stop order setting process for promotion generation, if any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is won, the second RT replay prize can be established. Set the data to notify the stop order of. In this case, the stop operation for enabling the second RT replay winning is established by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the order is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the second RT replay winning in this way, it is possible to shift from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3.

On the other hand, when the lottery result command indicating that the promotion target combination has been won is received (step S2212: YES), and the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0" (step S2213). : NO), the stop order setting process for avoidance is executed (step S2215). In the stop order setting process for avoidance, data is set to notify the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay prize. In this case, the stop order for enabling the normal replay prize to be established until the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R). The display of the image display device 66 is controlled so that the notification of the above is started. By notifying the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning in this way, it is possible to avoid the establishment of the second RT replay winning, and the transition from the first RT mode ST2 to the second RT mode ST3 is made. It is possible to avoid it.

In the stop order notification process, in step S2216, a lottery result command indicating that IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is won, or IV = in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). It is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating that 22 has been won has been received from the main MPU 72. For IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) and IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18), a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Winning data will be set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2216, a lottery table corresponding to the value of the remaining ART execution counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read from the sub-side ROM 83 (step S2217), and the read lottery table is used to draw a lottery for stop order notification. The process is executed (step S2218). In the lottery process of stop order notification, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the lottery table. .. Then, when the result of the lottery process of the stop order notification is the notification winning result (step S2219: YES), the stop order setting process for the effect is executed (step S2220). In the stop order setting process for staging, the stop order to be notified this time is determined by lottery among the six stop orders, and data is set to notify the stop order determined by the lottery. In this case, by the time the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes effective in this game (that is, during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), the notification of the stop order determined by the lottery this time is started. The image display device 66 is displayed and controlled so as to be so. However, either when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the notified stop order, or when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the notified stop order. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the notified stop order, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not treated as a penalty event during the ART end branch state.

The lottery table referred to in the lottery process of the stop order notification is set so that the probability of the notification winning result differs depending on the value of the remaining ART execution counter. The lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 48. As shown in FIG. 48, in the lottery table, the notification winning probability is 10% when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0", and the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "1" or "2". In the case, the notification winning probability is 60%, the notification winning probability is 80% when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "3" or "4", and the notification is notified when the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 5 or more. The winning probability is set to be 100%.

In this case, when IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) wins, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is "0". When the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the probability that the notification of the stop order for the effect is executed can be increased as compared with the case of. With such a configuration, the higher the frequency with which the stop order is notified and the normal replay winning is established in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that a new execution time in the ART state will be started. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that many notifications of the stop order will occur in the ART end branch state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game in the ART end branch state.

Further, when the winner is won at IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18), the value of the remaining ART execution counter is a large value. In the case, it is possible to increase the probability that the notification of the stop order for the effect is executed. With such a configuration, the higher the frequency with which the stop order is notified and the normal replay winning is established in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that the ART state is executed many times. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that many notifications of the stop order will occur in the ART end branch state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game in the ART end branch state.

Here, in the ART end branch state, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table. When any of IV = 11 to 15 in FIG. 18 is won, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is notified regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter. On the other hand, as described above, the more frequently the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning is notified in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that a new execution time of the ART state will occur. As a result, the notification of the stop order executed in order to avoid the shift of the lottery mode to the additional RT mode ST4 and the bonus RT mode ST5 in the ART end branch state is used as an effect for raising the expectation of the player. Is possible.

Returning to the explanation of the ART end branch processing (FIG. 46), in the ART end branch processing, a prize is shown indicating that the game is won by any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). When the result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2104: YES), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning (step S2105: YES), and the sub side is further stopped. On condition that the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the RAM 84 is 1 or more (step S2106: YES), the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S2107), and the AT state of the sub-side RAM 84 is in the AT state. “4” is set in the counter (step S2108). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART state processing (step S909) described later in the next AT processing (FIG. 25), and the gaming state shifts from the ART preparation state to the ART state.

In the ART end branch processing, when a winning result command indicating that the game is won by any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is received from the main MPU 72 ( Step S2109: YES), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order for establishing the first fall replay winning (step S2110: YES), and the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is "0". (Step S211: YES), the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2112). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the non-AT in-process (step S704) from the next periodic process (FIG. 23), and the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 will return from the first AT state to the non-AT state.

As described above, when the condition for transition to the ART state is satisfied, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the second RT mode ST3, so that the control state of the sub MPU 82 becomes the first AT state and the gaming state becomes ART. It becomes a state. In the ART state, the ART state process (FIG. 44) is executed in the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, the state in which the replay probability is higher than in the normal game state and the expected number of medals per unit game is increased continues over a plurality of games, which is advantageous for the player.

When one execution time in the ART state ends, the state shifts to the ART end branch state regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied. Then, when the condition for starting the new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, so that the new execution time in the ART state is started. On the other hand, if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is not satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1 and the ART end branch state ends. By executing the ART end branch state regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied in this way, the ART state is changed every time one execution time in the ART state ends. It is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of a new execution time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. In order for the fall to the 1st RT mode ST2 to occur, it is necessary to establish the 2nd fall replay prize in the game in which any of IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the 2nd RT mode (FIG. 18) is won. .. Further, in the ART end branch state, when the fall target combination is won, the notification of the stop order for establishing the second fall replay prize and the notification of the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the second fall replay prize are notified. In the game in which the fall target combination is won without being executed, the notification that the player can recognize that the game is the fall target combination is started at the start of the game and is set as the first stop. Even if the reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped, no penalty event occurs. This makes it possible to continue the ART end branch state, which is advantageous for the player, for a long time depending on the luck of the player.

In particular, even when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the ART end branch state occurs, and the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 once falls to the first RT mode ST2, and then the lottery is performed. By allowing the new execution times of the ART state to be started when the mode is promoted to the second RT mode ST3 again, the condition for starting the new execution times of the ART state is satisfied. An advantageous state in which the number of continuous games changes depending on the luck of the player intervenes between one execution time and the next execution time in the ART state, and it becomes possible to increase the profit of the player.

Even if the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the normal mode ST1 in the ART end branch state in the situation where the condition for starting the new execution times in the ART state is satisfied, the new execution times in the ART state will be performed. The state in which the condition to be started is satisfied is maintained. This makes it possible to bring about the effect of shifting to the ART end branch state while not losing the benefit of starting a new execution time of the ART state.

However, if the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the normal mode ST1 in the ART end branch state in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the advantage in the ART end branch state is increased. descend. As a result, it is possible to impose a penalty for causing a fall to the normal mode ST1 even though the situation is such that the fall to the normal mode ST1 can be avoided.

In the ART end branch state, if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the player wins at any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). If the game is playing, the stop order notification is executed to prevent the first fall replay winning from being established, and the player wins at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). If the game is playing, the notification of the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning is executed. In this case, in the ART end branch state, the stop order notification is executed even if the game is not won in any of IV = 15 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the stop order notification in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, and a new execution time in the ART state is started. Even in a situation where the conditions to be satisfied are not satisfied, it is possible to notify the stop order with a certain frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the notification of the stop order being executed in the ART end branch state.

In the ART end branch state, when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the probability that the notification of the stop order in which the normal replay winning is established is generated is higher. As a result, in the ART end branch state, the player plays the game while expecting that the notification of the stop order is generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the ART end branch state, when IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) wins, the value of the remaining ART execution counter is ". When the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, the probability that the notification of the stop order for the effect is executed is higher than the case of "0". As a result, the higher the frequency with which the stop order is notified and the normal replay winning is established in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that a new execution time in the ART state will be started. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that many notifications of the stop order will occur in the ART end branch state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game in the ART end branch state.

Further, in the ART end branch state, when IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) or IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18) wins, the value of the remaining ART execution counter. When is a large value, the probability that the stop order notification for the effect is executed is higher. As a result, the higher the frequency with which the stop order is notified and the normal replay winning is established in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that the ART state has been executed many times. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that many notifications of the stop order will occur in the ART end branch state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game in the ART end branch state.

In the ART end branch state, IV = 11 to 14 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11), IV = 11 to 14 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18). ), When any of IV = 11 to 15 is won, the stop order for enabling the establishment of the normal replay winning is notified regardless of the value of the remaining ART execution counter. On the other hand, as described above, the higher the frequency of notifying the stop order for establishing the normal replay winning in the ART end branch state, the higher the probability that a new execution time in the ART state will occur. As a result, the notification of the stop order executed in order to avoid the shift of the lottery mode to the additional RT mode ST4 and the bonus RT mode ST5 in the ART end branch state is used as an effect for raising the expectation of the player. Is possible.

<External output from slot machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of the external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 49A is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of the electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. 49B is an external terminal board 90 provided in the slot machine 10. It is a front view of.

As shown in FIG. 49A, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a large number of slot machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. Further, in the island equipment S, a data counter DC is installed so as to correspond one-to-one with each slot machine 10. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10 and displays the number of times the game has been executed since the second RT mode ST3 or the bonus RT mode ST5 ended and the normal mode ST1 started. The first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the 2RT mode ST3, and the number of times the game has been executed in the bonus state (IV = 1 to 6), the number of times the game has been won is 20 times. The second display unit DC2 for displaying the number of occurrences of the number of occurrences of the bonus state (1 execution time in the bonus state ends) and the execution time in the ART state (1 execution in the ART state when the ART game number counter becomes "0") A third display unit DC3 is provided for displaying the number of occurrences of (the time is completed).

A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as a management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. The whole computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and the MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and a ROM 202 storing fixed value data, various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202, information input from the slot machine 10, and the like are temporarily stored in the MPU 201. It is provided with RAM 203, which is a memory for storing the data.

The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL1 and is electrically connected to each data counter DC through the electrical wiring group EL2. Then, the management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and the signal corresponding to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the external terminal board 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. The main MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3, and has a predetermined voltage to the external terminals 90a to 90h depending on the processing result. Output a signal. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information output externally to the hall computer HC are different.

Specifically, in order to output the external terminal 90a for the input signal used for outputting the information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game, and the information indicating the number of medals given in each game. External terminal 90b for anomalous signal used for the slot machine 10 and an external terminal 90c for anomalous signal used to output information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected the occurrence of an error such as an input abnormality or a payout abnormality. An external terminal 90d for a setting operation signal used to output information indicating that a change operation is being executed, and an open signal used to output information indicating that the front door 12 is open. External terminal 90e, an external terminal 90f for a settlement signal used to output information indicating that the medal is being settled, and a bonus used to output information indicating that the bonus RT mode is ST5. An external terminal 90g for a medium signal and an external terminal 90h for an ART medium signal used for outputting information indicating that the second RT mode is ST3 are included.

Of these, a number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets are output from the external terminal 90a for the input signal. Specifically, at the start of one game, the pulse signal is output three times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec. The hall computer HC determines that one game has started by receiving a group of pulse signals from the external terminal 90a for the input signal, and displays the number of times the game has been executed on the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Is added by 1.

A number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of payouts are output from the external terminal 90b for the applied signal. For example, when nine medals or virtual medals are given, a pulse signal is output nine times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game, and the four medals or virtual medals are given. When is given, the pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the end of one game. The hall computer HC manages the number of medals or virtual medals to be paid out in the corresponding slot machine 10 according to the number of pulse signals received from the external terminal 90b for the given signal. For example, the one-sunrise ball management of the corresponding slot machine 10 is performed.

The external terminal 90c for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90d for the setting operation signal, the external terminal 90e for the open signal, and the external terminal 90f for the settlement signal are in the ON state while the respective target events are occurring. Is maintained. The external terminal 90d for the setting operation signal may be configured to output an ON signal not only during the operation of changing the setting but also during the operation of confirming the current set value. Further, both the abnormality signal and the setting operation signal may be output from one external terminal. The hall computer HC manages the state of the corresponding slot machine 10 based on the reception status of the signals from these external terminals 90c to 90f.

The external terminal 90g for the bonus intermediate signal is used to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times the bonus state is executed. The whole computer HC determines that the execution times of the bonus state have been newly started by confirming the rising edge of the signal from the external terminal 90g for the signal during the bonus, and the bonus state in the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of occurrences of the execution times of is added by 1. Further, the hall computer HC determines that one execution of the bonus state has been completed by confirming the falling edge of the signal from the external terminal 90g for the bonus signal, and in the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Clear the display to "0".

The external terminal 90h for the signal during ART is used to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times the ART state is executed. By confirming the rising edge of the signal from the external terminal 90h for the signal during ART, the hall computer HC determines that the execution time of the ART state has been newly started, and determines that the execution time of the ART state has been newly started, and the ART state in the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of occurrences of the execution times of is added by 1, and the display on the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC is cleared to "0". Further, the hall computer HC determines that one execution of the ART state has been completed by confirming the falling edge of the signal from the external terminal 90h for the signal during ART, and in the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Clear the display to "0".

<External output setting process>
The process for performing ON / OFF control of the bonus signal and ON / OFF control of the ART signal will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an external output setting process executed in step S212 in the normal process (FIG. 9) of the main MPU 72.

First, a process for controlling ON / OFF of the bonus signal will be described.

In the external output setting process, when the bonus signal is in the OFF state (step S2301: NO), it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the OFF continuation period is being measured. The OFF continuation period is a configuration in which the state of the bonus signal is switched from ON state to OFF state to ON state when a new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started after one execution time of the bonus state is completed. , Is a period set to maintain the intermediate OFF state for a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). By maintaining the OFF state for a predetermined period of time in this way, even if a new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started after one execution time of the bonus state is completed, the new execution time of the new execution time is started. It is possible to make the hall computer HC clearly recognize the rise of the bonus mid signal to the ON state for the occurrence of the bonus state.

When the OFF continuation period is not being measured (step S2302: NO), it is determined in step S2303 whether or not "1" is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74. As described above, the process of setting the bonus output start flag to "1" is performed in step S1103 in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) of the main MPU 72 when the transition to the bonus RT mode ST5 occurs. It is executed in step S1806 in the end branch processing (FIG. 42) of the main MPU 72 when the continuation condition of the new execution times to the bonus state is satisfied. When "1" is set in the bonus output start flag (step S2303: YES), the bonus in-bonus signal is set to the ON state, and the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step). S2304).

In the external output setting process, when the bonus signal is in the ON state (step S2301: YES), it is determined in step S2305 whether or not "1" is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74. When the bonus output start flag is set to "1" when the bonus signal is ON, the new execution time of the bonus state is immediately started after one execution time of the bonus state is completed. It is a situation to do. When "1" is set in the bonus output start flag (step S2305: YES), the value corresponding to the OFF continuation period (for example, 1 sec) is set in the OFF continuation period counter provided in the main RAM 74. The value set in the OFF continuation period counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). Further, the bonus signal is set to the OFF state (step S2307).

When the bonus in-bonus signal is in the ON state and "1" is not set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2301: YES, step S2305: NO), in step S2308, the main side It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the bonus output end flag of the RAM 74. As already explained, the process in which "1" is set in the bonus output end flag is mainly performed when one execution time in the bonus state ends in a situation where the continuation condition of the new execution time in the bonus state is not satisfied. It is executed in step S1803 in the end branch processing (FIG. 42) of the side MPU 72. When "1" is set in the bonus output end flag (step S2308: YES), the bonus signal is set to the OFF state and the bonus output end flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step). S2309).

As described above, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5, the bonus intermediate signal is set to the ON state regardless of whether the game state is the bonus state, and the bonus RT mode ST5 starts. When the game is executed with IV = 1 to 6 for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, the bonus in-bonus signal is set to the OFF state. To. In order to shift to the bonus RT mode ST5, it is necessary to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the stop order of the bonus opportunity correspondence in the game in which the bonus opportunity corresponding combination is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 10) in the main MPU 72. There is. In this case, the stop order for the bonus trigger does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L at the first stop, and if the condition for transition to the bonus state is not satisfied, the bonus trigger response role In the game that won the prize, the stop order corresponding to the bonus opportunity is not notified. Further, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is a non-AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player and the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first stop. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where the stop order notification is not executed in the 2AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player. Therefore, the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 is low in the situation where the condition for shifting to the bonus state is not satisfied. Then, in such a situation, when the bonus RT mode ST5 is started, the bonus signal is set to the ON state, and when the condition set as the end condition of one execution of the bonus state is satisfied, the bonus signal is set. By setting it to the OFF state, the signal output from the sub-side MPU 82 to the main-side MPU 72, which executes the monitoring process of whether or not the condition for transition to the bonus state is satisfied, is not required, and the bonus state is 1. It is possible to set the bonus signal to the ON state according to the situation where the execution times are started.

If a new execution time of the bonus state is started when the bonus signal is in the ON state, the bonus signal is sent after the OFF continuation period has elapsed after the bonus signal is once set to the OFF state. Set it to the ON state again. As a result, even if a new execution time in the bonus state is continuously executed after one execution time in the bonus state is completed, the bonus state signal is changed from the OFF state to the ON state corresponding to each execution time in the bonus state. It is possible to cause a change in. As a result, in the hall computer HC, it is possible to specify the number of times the bonus state is executed by grasping the number of times the bonus signal has changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

Next, a process for controlling ON / OFF of the signal during ART will be described.

In the external output setting process, when the signal during ART is in the OFF state (step S2310: NO), it is determined in step S2311 whether or not "1" is set in the ART output start flag of the main RAM 74. .. As described above, the process of setting the ART output start flag to "1" is performed in step S609 in the process of shifting to the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 when the transition to the second RT mode ST3 occurs (FIG. 22). Is executed. When "1" is set in the ART output start flag (step S2311: YES), the ART in-progress signal is set to the ON state, and the ART output start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step). S2312).

In the external output setting process, when the ART signal is in the ON state (step S2310: YES), the ART signal is set to the OFF state on condition that the lottery mode is the first RT mode ST2 (step S2313: YES). (Step S2314).

As described above, when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the second RT mode ST3, the ART in-signal is set to the ON state regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART state, and the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 is set. Is set to the OFF state when the first RT mode ST2 is entered. In order to shift to the second RT mode ST3, it is necessary to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the stop order for promotion generation in the game in which the promotion target combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72. be. In this case, the stop order for generating promotion does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L at the first stop, and if the condition for transition to the ART state is not satisfied, the winning combination is promoted. In the winning game, the stop order for promotion is not notified. Further, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is a non-AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player and the control state of the sub-side MPU 82 is the first stop. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where the stop order notification is not executed in the 2AT state, a penalty is imposed on the player. Therefore, the probability that the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 is low in the situation where the condition for shifting to the ART state is not satisfied. Under such circumstances, the ART in-signal is set to the ON state when the second RT mode ST3 is started, and the ART in-signal is set to the OFF state when the first RT mode ST2 is entered. , It corresponds to the start of one execution of the ART state while eliminating the need for signal output from the sub-side MPU 82 that executes the monitoring process of whether or not the transitionable condition to the ART state is satisfied to the main-side MPU 72. It is possible to set the ART signal to the ON state.

Further, as described above, when one execution time in the ART state is completed in a situation where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more, a new execution time in the ART state is not immediately started, but the main side. When the lottery mode of the MPU 72 temporarily shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, and then the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3 again, a new execution round of the ART state is started. As a result, even if a new execution time in the ART state is continuously executed after one execution time in the ART state is completed, the signal in the ART state is changed from the OFF state to the ON state in correspondence with each execution time in the ART state. It is possible to cause a change in. As a result, in the hall computer HC, it is possible to specify the number of times the ART state has been executed by grasping the number of times the signal during ART has changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the bonus state, if the winner is any of IV = 7 to 10, the continuous lottery process is executed, and if the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result, the new execution times of the bonus state are executed. The condition for starting is satisfied. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the winning result will be continuously generated in the bonus state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the lottery result is not notified to the player at the timing when the continuous lottery process is executed, and the result of the continuous lottery process is collectively notified during the continuous chance period generated in the final game in the bonus state. .. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the period in which the result of the continuous lottery process is notified into the continuation chance period, and it is possible to generate a period in which the attention of the player who expects the continuous winning result to be generated increases. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to expect the player to execute the continuous lottery process until the continuation chance period starts and that the result of the continuous lottery process will be the continuous winning result, and continue. In the chance period, it is possible to expect that the notification indicating that the winning result is continuously executed is executed, so that it is possible to change the target that the player pays attention to in the bonus state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the bonus state.

During the continuation chance period, the reels 32L, 32M are executed after the game start condition is satisfied and the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, and then the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process is executed. , 32R occurs during the period when the start of rotation is blocked. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the unit production performed during the continuation chance period. In this case, the continuation period of each unit effect is not adjusted according to the number of executions of the unit effect within the range where the continuation period of the continuation chance period is fixed, or the number of executions of the unit effect is not adjusted. The duration of the continuation chance period changes according to the number of executions of. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is increased with respect to the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period.

Basically, in the continuation chance period, the unit effect is executed once for one lottery result data of the continuous lottery process, and in the continuation chance period, it corresponds to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination. In a configuration in which the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control is executed is prevented, if the cancel operation is executed by the player, the unit effect is executed during the continuation chance period. The number of times will be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the number of unit staging performed during the continuation chance period from becoming unnecessarily large. Further, even if the number of unit effects executed during the continuation chance period is reduced, the number of executions of the continuous lottery process and the result of the continuous lottery process are not affected, so that the player's profit is not lost. It is possible to prevent the number of unit productions performed during the chance period from becoming unnecessarily large.

The continuation chance period occurs in the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state. Further, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect becomes the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result, and then the bonus state is newly added. Execution times are started. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed as the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R immediately before the start of the new execution time of the bonus state, so that the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the display corresponds to the start of a new execution time of the bonus state.

When one execution time in the ART state ends, the state shifts to the ART end branch state regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. In the ART end branch state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 falls to the first RT mode ST2 regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied. Then, when the condition for starting the new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode ST3, so that the new execution time in the ART state is started. On the other hand, if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is not satisfied, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode ST1 and the ART end branch state ends. By executing the ART end branch state regardless of whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied in this way, the ART state is changed every time one execution time in the ART state ends. It is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of a new execution time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the ART end branch state, if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, the player wins at any of IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). If the game is playing, the stop order notification is executed to prevent the first fall replay winning from being established, and the player wins at any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). If the game is playing, the notification of the stop order for establishing the second RT replay winning is executed. In this case, in the ART end branch state, the stop order notification is executed even if the game is not won in any of IV = 15 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the stop order notification in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, and a new execution time in the ART state is started. Even in a situation where the conditions to be satisfied are not satisfied, it is possible to notify the stop order with a certain frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the notification of the stop order being executed in the ART end branch state.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for controlling the execution of the continuation chance period in the bonus state is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different processing configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 to execute the continuation chance period.

In the present embodiment, as the area used by the main MPU 72 to execute the continuation chance period, the main RAM 74 has the first to fourth storage areas 101a to 104a and the first to fourth determination count counters 101b. ~ 104b and the hit / fail determination number counter 105 are not provided. Instead, the main RAM 74 is won with the first lottery counter 111 for storing the number of times the continuous lottery process should be executed when the winning is done with IV = 7, and the winning with IV = 8. The second lottery counter 112 for storing the number of times the continuous lottery process should be executed in the wake of this, and the number of times the continuous lottery process should be executed in the wake of winning at IV = 9. A third lottery count counter 113 and a fourth lottery count counter 114 for storing the number of times the continuous lottery process should be executed when the winner is won at IV = 10 are provided.

That is, in the first embodiment, if a player wins in any of IV = 7 to 10 in a period prior to the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the continuous lottery process is performed in the game in which the winning combination is won. The lottery result is executed and the lottery result is stored in a memory, and the unit production corresponding to the lottery result is executed in the continuation chance period. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the player wins at any of IV = 7 to 10 in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the main MPU 72 is informed that the continuous lottery process should be executed. Data is set for identification, and the continuous lottery process is collectively executed during the continuation chance period on condition that the data setting is performed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a bonus RT management process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the bonus RT management process, as in the bonus RT management process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, when "1" is set in the bonus RT start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2401: YES). "20" is set in the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74, the bonus RT start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0", and "1" is set in the bonus RT middle flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2402). Further, "1" is set in the bonus output start flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2403).

In the bonus RT management process, when "1" is set in the bonus RT in-progress flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2404: YES), IV = 7 to in the bonus RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) in this game. On condition that the game is won in any of 10 (step S2405: YES), the stored lottery table corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2406). Then, the storage lottery process is executed (step S2407). In the stored lottery process, the value of the main side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) is read out in the main side RAM 74, and the value of the main side lottery counter is collated with the stored lottery table. The storage lottery table is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence to the values of IV = 7 to 10. When IV = 7, the storage lottery process results in a storage winning result with a probability of 70%, and IV = In the case of 8, the storage lottery process results in a storage winning result with an 80% probability, in the case of IV = 9, the storage lottery process results in a storage winning result, and in the case of IV = 10, the storage winning result is stored. Each storage lottery table is set so that the storage winning result is obtained with a 100% probability in the lottery process.

When the stored winning result is obtained (step S2408: YES), the value of the lottery count counter corresponding to the winning combination among the first to fourth lottery count counters 111 to 114 of the main RAM 74 in step S2409. Is added by 1. That is, if the game is won at IV = 7, the value of the first lottery counter 111 is added by 1, and if the game is won at IV = 8, the value of the second lottery counter 112 is added by 1. Then, if the game is won at IV = 9, the value of the third lottery counter 113 is added by 1, and if the game is won at IV = 10, the value of the fourth lottery counter 114 is added by 1. do. As a result, the number of times to execute the continuous lottery process corresponding to the winning combination of IV = 7 to 10 is added by 1.

Here, as described above, the storage lottery process is not always executed when a winner is won in any of IV = 7 to 10, but is won in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5. Will only be executed if If the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the bonus RT mode ST5 due to the stop operation corresponding to the player's penalty event even though the sub MPU 82 is in the non-AT state, the first fall in the bonus RT mode ST5. The lottery mode immediately falls to the normal mode ST1 due to the fact that the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. In this case, the storage lottery process is executed only when the winning is achieved in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5, so that the main MPU 72 is not in the bonus state in the game state. Even if the processing after step S2405 in the bonus RT management processing (FIG. 52) is executed, the probability that the storage lottery processing is executed in the situation can be reduced. Then, by lowering the probability that the stored lottery process is executed in this way, the probability that a continuation chance period will occur in a situation where the game state is not a bonus state and a new execution time of the bonus state will be continuously executed. It is possible to reduce the probability that it will be done.

In the bonus RT management process, if the game is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 regardless of the type of lottery mode (step S2410: YES), it does not matter whether the bell prize is established or not. , The value of the bell establishment counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2411). When the value of the bell establishment counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2412: YES), it means that the number of games won in any of IV = 1 to 6 has reached the end reference game number. do. In this case, the end branch processing for determining the control state in the main MPU 72 after that is executed (step S2413). The content of the end branching process is the same as that of the end branching process (FIG. 42) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a continuation chance process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the continuation chance process, other processes are executed in step S2501. In other processes, the processes of steps S1401 to S1407, steps S1418, and steps S1419 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment are executed. After that, on condition that the first credit insertion button 47 is operated as the start operation of the unit effect, or the start restriction period during the current measurement has elapsed (step S2502 or step S2503: YES), step S2504. The process for starting the unit effect shown below is executed.

In the process for starting the unit effect, first, a process for specifying the lottery target is executed (step S2504). In the lottery target specifying process, when the value of the fourth lottery count counter 114 of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, the fourth lottery count counter 114 is specified as the lottery target, and the fourth lottery count counter of the main RAM 74 is specified. When the value of 114 is "0" and the value of the third lottery count counter 113 is 1 or more, the third lottery count counter 113 is specified as a lottery target, and the third lottery count counter 113 of the main RAM 74 is specified. When the value of is "0" and the value of the second lottery count counter 112 is 1 or more, the second lottery count counter 112 is specified as a lottery target, and the second lottery count counter 112 of the main RAM 74 When the value is "0" and the value of the first lottery count counter 111 is 1 or more, the first lottery count counter 111 is specified as a lottery target.

After that, the values of the lottery count counters 111 to 114 specified as the current lottery targets are subtracted by 1 (step S2505). Further, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the current lottery target is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S2506). Then, the continuous lottery process is executed (step S2507). In the continuous lottery process, the value of the main side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the value of the main side lottery counter is collated with the continuous lottery table. The continuous lottery table is prepared with a one-to-one correspondence to the values of IV = 7 to 10, and in the case of IV = 7, the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning result with a probability of 10%, and IV = In the case of 8, the continuous lottery process has a 20% probability of a continuous winning result, in the case of IV = 9, the continuous lottery process has a 30% probability of a continuous winning result, and in the case of IV = 10, the continuous winning result is continued. Each continuous lottery table is set so that the continuous winning result is obtained with a probability of 40% in the lottery process.

Here, as described above, priority is given to the execution target of the continuous lottery process in the order of the fourth lottery count counter 114 → the third lottery count counter 113 → the second lottery count counter 112 → the first lottery count counter 111. Will be. On the other hand, the probability that the continuous winning result will be obtained in the continuous lottery process is as high as the lottery count counters 111 to 114, which have a high priority in digestion. As a result, the lottery counters 111 to 114 on the side with the highest probability of being a continuous winning result are selected as the execution target of the continuous lottery process, so that the probability that the unit effect that is the continuous winning result is executed at an early stage. Can be increased.

When the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous disconnection result (step S2508: NO), the drive table corresponding to the continuous disconnection result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is performed (step S2508: NO). Step S2509). Further, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0" (step S2510). The processing contents of these steps S2509 and S2510 are the same as those of step S1412 and step S1413 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the other hand, when the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result (step S2508: YES), the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is set. (Step S2511). Further, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2512). The processing contents of these steps S2511 and S2512 are the same as those of step S1414 and step S1415 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, if the player wins in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the period before the continuation chance period in the bonus state, the main MPU 72 is informed that the continuous lottery process should be executed. Data is set for identification, and the continuous lottery process is collectively executed during the continuation chance period on condition that the data setting is performed. In this case, although it is necessary to repeatedly execute the continuous lottery process during the continuous chance period, it is possible to shorten the period for storing and retaining the result of the continuous lottery process, so that the lottery corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process can be shortened. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the result data will be rewritten due to electrical noise or the like.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progress of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a cancellation process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the cancellation process, first, the storage area identification process is executed (step S2601). In the storage area specifying process, the same process as the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) in step S1410 in the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, the lottery result data set in the read target bit is read in the storage area on the higher priority side of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. When the lottery result data is read out in the storage area specifying process, it is determined whether or not the read lottery result data corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S2602).

When corresponding to the continuation loss result (step S2602: NO), the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted as in step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The process is executed (step S2603). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed. After that, in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 of the main RAM 74 is “0”. If the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S2601, and if the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2605.

In step S2605, the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". After that, a cancel command corresponding to the continuous discontinuity result is set (step S2606). The cancellation command for the continuous loss result is that the occurrence of the cancel operation was effectively accepted during the continuation chance period, and the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included in the lottery result data that was the subject of this judgment. This is a command sent to the sub-side MPU 82 to understand that it did not exist.

The processing contents of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancel command corresponding to the continuous loss result is received will be described. FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing in the present embodiment executed by the sub-side MPU 82. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the cancel command corresponding to the continuous discontinuity result (step S2701: YES), the sub-side MPU 82 executes the setting process corresponding to the continuous discontinuity result (step S2702). In the setting process for the continuous loss result correspondence, the player can recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result did not exist in the lottery result data that was the judgment target triggered by the cancel operation. Data is set for executing the effect of the above on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 55 (b), the effect of making the player recognizable that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result did not exist is executed.

Returning to the description of the cancellation process (FIG. 54), when it is specified in step S2602 that the continuous winning result is supported (step S2602: YES), the continuation chance process in the first embodiment (FIG. 37). In the same manner as in step S1416 of the above, the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area shift process is executed (step S2607). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed.

After that, "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2608), and a cancellation command corresponding to the continuation winning result is set (step S2609). The cancellation command for the continuous winning result is that the occurrence of the cancel operation was effectively accepted during the continuous chance period, and the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included in the lottery result data that was the subject of this judgment. This is a command sent to the sub-side MPU 82 to know that it exists.

The processing content of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancellation command corresponding to the continuous winning result is received will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a) again. When the sub-side MPU 82 receives the cancel command corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S2703: YES), the sub-side MPU 82 executes the setting process corresponding to the continuous winning result (step S2704). In the setting process for the continuous winning result, the player can recognize that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result exists in the lottery result data to be determined by the cancel operation. Data is set for executing the effect on the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66. As a result, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 55 (c), the effect of making the player recognizable that the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result existed is executed. In the other processes of step S2705 in the bonus state process, the processes of steps S1201 to S1220 of the bonus state process (FIG. 32) in the first embodiment are executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the cancel operation is executed, a plurality of lottery result data are collectively specified as a specific target, but the unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not executed for the specific result. The specific result is notified as an effect using the image display device 66. On the other hand, if the cancel operation is not performed, the unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed every time the lottery result data becomes a specific target. As a result, when the cancel operation is performed, the player is notified whether or not the continuous winning result is obtained in a manner different from the case where the cancel operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize whether or not the cancel operation is effectively accepted, and it is possible to clearly distinguish between the normal unit effect and the effect at the time of the cancel operation. ..

Further, when the cancel operation is executed, the specific result of the lottery result data is notified as the effect using the image display device 66 without executing the unit effect using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, thereby canceling. When the operation is executed, it is possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high even in a configuration in which the specific processing of the lottery result data can be repeatedly executed.

When the main MPU 72 executes the process of step S2606 or step S2609, the continuation chance period is terminated by clearing the continuation chance flag of the main RAM 74 to "0", and the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10). The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to which the stop control corresponding to the above is executed is started. In this case, in the situation where the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated, the image display device 66 executes the notification corresponding to the specific result of the lottery result data at the time of the cancel operation. According to this configuration, it is possible to end the continuation chance period at an early stage when the cancellation operation is performed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progress of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a continuation chance process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. In step S2801 to step S2806 and step S2808 to step S2818 in the continuation chance processing, the same processing as in steps S1401 to S1406 and step S1408 to step S1418 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment is performed. Run. On the other hand, in step S2807, it is determined not only whether or not the cancel operation has been performed, but also whether or not "1" is set in the canceling flag of the main RAM 74. The canceling flag indicates that there is lottery result data that has not yet been specified at the time of cancellation in a situation where the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is not executed when the cancel operation is effectively accepted. This is a flag to be specified by the main MPU 72. When the cancel operation is executed or when "1" is set in the canceling flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2807: YES), the cancel process is executed in step S2819.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a cancellation process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

In the cancellation process, first, a cancellation command is set (step S2901). The processing content of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancel command is set is the same as that of the first embodiment.

After that, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed in the same manner as in step S1410 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment (step S2902). As a result, the lottery result data set in the read target bit is read in the storage area on the higher priority side of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. After that, it is determined whether or not the bit to be read this time corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S2903).

When corresponding to the continuation loss result (step S2903: NO), the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted as in step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The process is executed (step S2904). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed. After that, in step S2905, it is determined whether or not the value of the determination number counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data has been read out this time is "0". If the value of the corresponding determination number counters 101b to 104 is 1 or more, the process returns to step S2903, and if the value of the corresponding determination number counters 101b to 104b is "0", the process proceeds to step S2906.

In step S2906, by determining whether or not the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is "0", is there a storage area 101a to 104a in which lottery result data that is not a specific target remains? Judge whether or not. If the value of the hit / fail determination counter 105 is not "0" (step S2906: NO), "1" is set in the canceling flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2907). As a result, in the processing times of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 56) after the end of the unit effect for which the start setting has been made this time, even if the cancel operation is not newly performed, an affirmative judgment is made in step S2807 and the cancellation is performed. The processing will be executed again.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2906, or when the process of step S2907 is executed, the drive table corresponding to the continuous disconnection result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is performed (. Step S2908). Further, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared by "0" (step S2909). The processing contents of these steps S2908 and S2909 are the same as those of step S1412 and step S1413 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the other hand, when the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result (step S2903: YES), the counter subtraction process is executed in the same manner as in step S1416 of the continuous chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. At the same time, the storage area shift process is executed (step S2910). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed.

After that, the drive table corresponding to the continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is performed (step S2911). Further, "1" is set in the unit production flag of the main RAM 74, and "1" is set in the bonus continuation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2912). The processing contents of these steps S2911 and S2912 are the same as those of step S1414 and step S1415 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, when the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is performed, even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuation winning result is not executed, the winning / failing result 1st to 4th storage areas 101a to The unit effect is executed once in the unit of one storage area out of 104a. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times the unit effect is executed even when the cancel operation is executed, and it is possible to raise the expectation that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result will be executed. It will be possible.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the subsequent progress of the continuation chance period when the cancel operation is executed is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a cancellation process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. In the cancellation process, first, a cancellation command is set (step S3001). The processing content of the sub-side MPU 82 when the cancel command is set is the same as that of the first embodiment.

After that, the storage area specifying process (FIG. 38) is executed in the same manner as in step S1410 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment (step S3002). As a result, the lottery result data set in the read target bit is read in the storage area on the higher priority side of the storage areas 101a to 104a of the main RAM 74. After that, it is determined whether or not the bit to be read this time corresponds to the continuous winning result (step S3003).

When corresponding to the continuation loss result (step S3003: NO), the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is shifted as in step S1416 of the continuation chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. The process is executed (step S3004). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed.

On the other hand, when the continuous winning result is supported (step S3003: YES), the counter subtraction process is executed and the storage area is executed as in step S1416 of the continuous chance process (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Shift processing is executed (step S3005). As a result, the values of the determination count counters 101b to 104b corresponding to the storage areas 101a to 104a for which the lottery result data is read this time are subtracted by 1, and the value of the hit / fail determination count counter 105 is subtracted by 1. Further, the process of overwriting the data stored in the m + 1th bit with respect to the storage areas 101a to 104a from which the lottery result data is read this time is executed. After that, the value of the bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1. The bonus continuation counter is a counter for measuring the number of times that the lottery result data is specified to correspond to the continuous winning result in one processing time of the cancellation processing.

When the process of step S3004 is executed or the process of step S3006 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is “0”. If the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is not "0" (step S3007: NO), the process returns to the process of step S3002. As a result, when the cancel operation is executed, it becomes a specific target whether or not all the lottery result data correspond to the continuous winning result.

When the value of the hit / fail determination number counter 105 is “0”, it is determined in step S3008 whether or not the value of the bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is “0”. When the value of the bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S3008: YES), the drive table corresponding to the continuation disconnection result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission setting is performed (step). S3009). The processing content of step S3009 is the same as that of step S1412 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous disengagement result is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

On the other hand, when the value of the bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3008: NO), if the value of the bonus continuation counter is "1", the process proceeds to step S3011 and the value of the bonus continuation counter is 2. If the above is the case, the process proceeds to step S3012. In step S3011, the drive table corresponding to the first continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set. The processing content of the step S3011 is the same as that of step S1414 of the continuation chance processing (FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. As a result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result in the first embodiment is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S3012, the drive table corresponding to the second continuous winning result is read from the main ROM 73 and written to the main RAM 74, and the rotation drive control permission is set. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated in a manner different from both the case where the drive table corresponding to the continuous loss result is read and the case where the drive table corresponding to the first continuous winning result is read. The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are driven and controlled. Specifically, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have once moved from the standby position to the continuous corresponding position, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are set to 1 while maintaining the state in which the three "BAR" symbols are aligned in a straight line. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled so that the three "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the subline SL3 in the middle stage. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a new execution time of the bonus state will occur two or more times in the future.

If the value of the bonus continuation counter is 2 or more, when the next execution time of the bonus state ends, the execution time of the next bonus state will start immediately without shifting to the continuation chance period. Will be. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the bonus continuation counter is "L" which is 2 or more, a bell for specifying the end trigger of the bonus state at the start of a new execution time of the bonus state. By setting a value of 20 × L in the establishment counter, the bonus state for a plurality of execution times may be digested as one execution time.

After executing any of the processes of step S3009, step S3011, and step S3012, "1" is set in the unit directing flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3013).

In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, when the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is performed, all of them regardless of whether or not the data corresponding to the continuation winning result is included in the specified lottery result data. It is specified whether or not the lottery result data of the above corresponds to the continuous winning result. Then, the unit effect corresponding to the result of the specific processing for all the lottery result data is executed only once. As a result, when the cancel operation is performed, the specific processing for all the lottery result data existing at that time is completed, and the effects corresponding to the specific results are aggregated into one unit effect. It will be possible to make it.

When a plurality of data corresponding to the continuous winning result are included in the lottery result data to be specified, the mode is different from the case where only one data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included. The unit production is executed. As a result, if the cancellation operation is performed regardless of whether or not the lottery result data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included, all the lottery result data will be specified as the continuous winning result. It is possible to execute the unit effect in a manner corresponding to the number of corresponding lottery result data.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content of the ART state processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configurations will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing ART state processing in the present embodiment executed by the sub-side MPU 82. In the ART state processing, first, as other processing in step S3101, the same processing as in steps S2001 to S2022 of the ART state processing (FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed.

In the ART state processing, when the winning result command is received (step S3102: YES), the value of the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S3103). Then, when the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3104: YES), the ART continuous lottery process is executed (step S3105). In the ART continuous lottery process, the ART continuous lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read. The values are collated against the ART continuation lottery table. The ART continuation lottery table is set so that, for example, there is a 10% probability that the ART continuation lottery will be won.

When the result of the ART continuous lottery process is the ART continuous winning result (step S3106: YES), the set process to the ART game number counter is executed (step S3107). In the set process, the number of continuous games (for example, 50 games) is set in the ART game number counter of the sub-side RAM 84. In this case, the value of the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is maintained at "4". As a result, a new execution time of the ART state is started without shifting the gaming state from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

On the other hand, when the result of the ART continuation lottery process is not the ART continuation winning result (step S3106: NO), "5" is set in the AT status counter of the sub-side RAM 84 (step S3108). As a result, the sub-side MPU 82 will execute the ART end branch process (step S910) in the next AT in-process (FIG. 25), and the game state will shift from the ART state to the ART end branch state.

In the case of the present embodiment described in detail above, even if one execution time of the ART state is completed, a new execution time of the ART state is started without shifting to the ART end branch state, and a transition to the ART end branch state. After that, there may be a case where a new execution time of the ART state is started. As a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode of the gaming state when the execution times of the ART state are newly executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the case of this configuration, the player expects that a new execution time of the ART state is started as it is in the last game in one execution time of the ART state, and it is assumed that the transition to the ART end branch state has occurred. It is also expected that the ART state will be transferred to a new execution time in the ART end branch state. As a result, it is possible to gradually generate the points expected by the player, and from this point as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as a case where a new execution time in the ART state is executed, there are a case where the ART continuation winning is achieved in the ART continuation lottery process and a case where the value of the remaining ART execution counter is 1 or more. As a result, there are a plurality of types of opportunities for the execution times of the ART state to be continuously executed, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the execution times of the ART state are continued.

Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of triggers for continuous execution of the ART state as described above, the ART does not shift to the ART end branch state depending on the type of the trigger. There are cases where a new execution time of the state is started and a case where a new execution time of the ART state is started after shifting to the ART end branch state. As a result, when a new execution time of the ART state is started, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the trigger based on the start of the new execution time of the ART state. Become.

If the value of the remaining ART execution counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, a new execution time of the ART state is started without the transition to the ART end branch state, and the ART is performed by the ART continuous lottery process. In the case of continuous winning, the configuration may be such that a transition to the ART end branch state occurs.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In a configuration in which a continuous lottery process is executed in a game in which IV = 7 to 10 is won, an execution lottery process is executed when any of IV = 7 to 10 is won. However, the continuous lottery process may be executed when the game is won in the execution lottery process. In this case, if only one of IV = 7 to 10 is won, the execution of one execution of the unit production is not secured, and one of IV = 7 to 10 is won and the execution lottery process is performed. If the execution is won, the execution of one execution of the unit effect is secured. In addition, if some of the winning roles of IV = 7 to 10 are won, the continuous lottery process is surely executed, and for the other winning roles, the continuation is continued with a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). The lottery process may be executed.

(2) If any of IV = 7 to 10 is won, the continuous lottery process will be executed reliably or with a specific probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), and the result of the continuous lottery process will continue. If it is a winning result, it will surely be the execution target of the unit production, and if the result of the continuous lottery processing is the result of the continuation loss, it will be the execution target of the unit production with a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the continuous lottery process is executed, but to suppress the frequency with which the unit effect is executed to a predetermined frequency when the result of the continuous lottery process is the result of the continuous lottery.

(3) If any of IV = 7 to 10 is won, the continuous lottery process will be executed reliably or with a specific probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), and the result of the continuous lottery process will continue. Regardless of whether the result is a winning result or the result of the continuous lottery process is a continuous loss result, the unit effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). In this case, the unit effect may be executed with the same probability regardless of whether the result is a continuous winning result or a continuous winning result, and the continuous winning result is the continuous winning result. It may be a configuration in which the probability of being the target of execution of the unit effect is higher than in the case of good.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which the continuous lottery process is executed when the winner is won in any of IV = 7 to 10, the winner is won in any of IV = 1 to 6 in addition to IV = 7 to 10. In this case, the continuous lottery process may be executed. In this case, each winning probability of IV = 1 to 6 is higher than each winning probability of IV = 7 to 10, so if any of IV = 1 to 6 is won, it is determined by the execution lottery process. If the execution is won with a probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%), the continuous lottery process is executed, and if the winner is any of IV = 7 to 10, the continuous lottery process is surely executed. It may be configured as such.

Further, regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72, the execution lottery process is executed in each game in the bonus state, and the execution lottery process has a predetermined probability (greater than 0% and less than 100%). ) May be used to execute the continuous lottery process. In this case, the probability of winning the execution in the execution lottery process may differ depending on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the main MPU 72, and the probability of winning the execution varies depending on the result of the lottery process of the combination. It may be configured not to.

Further, the continuous lottery process may be executed according to the winning result in each game. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order of the execution trigger target and the winning of the execution trigger target is established in the combination lottery process (FIG. 10) on the main MPU 72. If this is the case, the continuous lottery process may be executed. In this configuration, if the winning combination that is the execution trigger is won in the combination lottery process, the corresponding notification is performed before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated, and the execution trigger target. By preventing the notification of the stop order from being executed, the continuous lottery process is executed according to the selection result of the stop order by the player. Therefore, the player's awareness of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is raised. It will be possible to increase.

(5) During the continuation chance period, the unit production is prioritized from the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the side with the high probability of the continuous winning result, but instead of this, the continuous winning is performed. The unit effect may be executed with priority given to the lottery result data of the continuous lottery process corresponding to the side having a low probability of being a result. In addition, instead of being divided into groups according to the probability of a continuous winning result and the unit effect being executed in order from a predetermined group, the lottery result data is acquired according to the acquisition order regardless of the probability of a continuous winning result. It may be configured to be the execution target of the unit production.

(6) If the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, the continuation chance period ends at that point, but instead of this, it is assumed that the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. However, if the execution opportunity of the unit effect remains, the unit effect may be executed until the continuation chance period is continued and the execution opportunity disappears. In this case, since the continuation chance period does not end with the execution opportunity of the unit effect remaining, the carry-over of the execution opportunity of the unit effect does not occur. In addition, when the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed a plurality of times in one continuation chance period, the execution times of the bonus state are repeated as many times as the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed. The configuration may be such that the number of continuous games in the new execution times in the bonus state is increased by the number of times the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed.

(7) In the case where the continuous lottery process is executed in the game in which IV = 7 to 10 is won, the presence or absence of the continuous winning result and the number of continuous winning results when the continuous chance period starts. Can be specified. In this case, in addition to the unit effect during the continuation chance period, the effect corresponding to the expectation that the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed may be executed, and the effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is supported. The effect suggesting that the unit effect to be performed may be executed before the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed, or the effect corresponding to the number of continuous winning results is executed. However, it may be configured such that an effect suggesting that the number of continuous winning results is a plurality is executed. In this case, during the continuation chance period, the player will have an effect that pays attention to other than the unit effect, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game during the continuation chance period.

(8) The unit effect is not limited to the configuration executed by using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and may be executed by a device different from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. For example, the unit effect may be executed by using the image display on the image display device 66. Even in this case, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the unit effect executed once in correspondence with one execution time of the continuous lottery process in the continuation chance period. Further, in a configuration in which the unit effect is executed by a device different from the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are executed with the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10). The continuation chance period may be executed in a situation where the start and stop of the rotation are not prevented. In this case, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped even if a continuation chance period occurs.

(9) In the configuration in which the unit effect is executed using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation mode of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect is not limited to that of the above embodiment and is arbitrary. .. For example, instead of the configuration in which the unit effect is executed by moving each reel 32L, 32M, 32R from the standby position to the continuous support position, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed rotation period after an acceleration period. The unit effect may be executed once by the operation that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops after at least one lap. In this configuration, the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect is the rotation speed of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed. It may have the same configuration. Further, in the case of the configuration, in the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous winning result is displayed such that the same symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are lined up in a straight line. In the unit staging corresponding to the continuous loss result, the stop result corresponding to the continuous loss result may be displayed such that the same symbols are not lined up in a straight line. Further, for example, the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is continued during the continuation chance period, and each unit effect is executed by changing the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be rotated. It may be configured.

(10) In the unit production, all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are configured to operate in the rotational direction, but instead, some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are maintained in a stopped state. The unit effect may be executed by the remaining reels operating in the rotation direction. For example, the unit effect may be executed by rotating the remaining one reel while the two reels are stopped. In this case, when the same predetermined symbol is stopped on one straight line on the two stopped reels, and the result of the continuous lottery process is the continuous winning result, the rotation of the remaining reels is completed. If the predetermined symbol stops on the straight line and the result of the continuous lottery process is a continuous loss result, the predetermined symbol does not stop on the straight line when the rotation of the remaining reels is completed. The configuration is conceivable.

(11) The unit effect is not limited to the configuration in which the unit effect is repeatedly executed in the continuation chance period, and the continuous lottery is performed by the start of the continuation chance period as in the case where the cancel operation is executed in each of the above embodiments. Even if the process is executed multiple times or the continuous lottery process is executed multiple times, the unit effect corresponding to the result of the continuous lottery process is executed only once. good. In this case, it is possible to shorten the duration of the continuation chance period.

(12) The reel 32L, in which the continuation chance period is after the start condition of the game is satisfied based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) of the winning combination is performed. The configuration is such that the rotation of the 32M and 32R is performed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is started. It may be configured to be performed after the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R having the stop order of the predetermined stop order is started, and the stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is performed. It may be configured to be performed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and before the final processing in the main MPU 72 of the game is executed, and the final processing in the main MPU 72 of the game may be performed. May be configured to be performed after is executed and before the operation of the start lever 41 for starting the next game is activated.

Here, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which is a game that triggers the end of one execution of the bonus state and the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) in the game is executed, is stopped. If the continuation chance period is executed after that, it is possible to start a new execution time of the bonus state when the combination of the same symbols is established in a straight line in the unit production corresponding to the continuation winning result. Will be. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a new execution time of the bonus state has been started when the combination of the same symbols is established in a straight line, and a new execution time of the bonus state is started. It is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

(13) The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production is stopped regardless of the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 during the continuation chance period. May also be configured to be stopped. In this case, the stop control of the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, but the result of the continuous lottery process is irrespective of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The corresponding stop result will be displayed. Further, in this configuration, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination are all stop buttons 42. It is preferable that the player can distinguish between the two because the operations of to 44 are triggered. Therefore, at the stage when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit production is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are moved up and down as if they are vibrating, and the stop control is performed in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be completely stopped.

(14) Even if the start operation of the unit effect is not executed in the continuation chance period, the unit effect is started when the start restriction period elapses. However, instead of this, the start operation of the unit effect is performed. The unit effect may not be started unless it is executed. Further, the unit effect may be started only when the start restriction period has elapsed. In this case, not only the execution period of the unit effect but also the period from the end of the unit effect of one execution time to the start of the unit effect of the next execution time can be made constant. In the configuration, the continuation period of the continuation chance period is specified by specifying the number of executions of the unit effect executed in the continuation chance period at the start of the continuation chance period, and the continuation chance occurs when the continuation period elapses. It may be configured to end the period.

(15) The operating means for executing the start operation of the unit effect is not limited to the first credit insertion button 47, and may be the start lever 41. In this case, it is possible to start the unit effect by the same operation as when starting a normal game.

(16) The reels 32L, 32M, are not limited to the configuration in which each execution time of the unit effect in the continuation chance period ends when the operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the unit effect of the execution time is stopped. Each execution of the unit effect may be terminated when the duration of the unit effect set as longer than the time required for the 32R to start and stop the operation has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to ensure that the duration of each execution of the unit effect is a predetermined predetermined period.

(17) The continuation chance period is not limited to the configuration that occurs in the game that triggers the end of one execution time in the bonus state, and the game is executed in the bonus state and one execution time in the bonus state. A continuation chance period may occur in a game that is executed before the game that triggers the end. In addition, in the configuration where the continuation chance period is generated only when the continuous winning result is obtained in the continuous lottery process and only the unit production corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed in the continuous chance period, one execution of the bonus state is executed. A continuation chance period may occur in the first game in the bonus state newly started after the end of the round.

(18) Even if the continuation period of the continuation chance period is fixed, at least one of the continuation period of each unit production and the number of unit productions executed in the continuation chance period is adjusted within the continuation period. good. In this case, it is possible to set a fixed period during which the start or stop of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed, is prevented. ..

(19) An upper limit period is set for the continuation period of the continuation chance period, and each execution time of the unit production is executed according to the number of lottery result data within the range until the upper limit period is reached, and the upper limit period is reached. If or reach, if the remaining lottery result data contains data corresponding to the continuous winning result, the remaining lottery result data is aggregated as a unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result. Is executed once, and if the remaining lottery result data does not include the data corresponding to the continuous winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous loss result is 1 as the unit effect in which the remaining lottery result data is aggregated. It may be configured to be executed once. In this case, it is possible to set the period during which the start or stop of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is within the upper limit period. Will be.

(20) If the cancel operation is executed during the continuation chance period, the continuation chance period may end immediately without executing the unit effect thereafter. In this case, in a situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop control corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10) is executed is executed, a new execution time in the bonus state is performed after the end of the game. The notification of whether or not to start may be executed in the image display device 66 or the like.

(21) Instead of the configuration in which the cancellation operation is not possible during the opening period of the continuation chance period, the configuration may be such that the cancellation operation is possible during the opening period. In this case, in the case where the cancel operation is executed as in the first embodiment, the unit effect corresponding to the remaining lottery result data is executed only once, and the opening period has elapsed. The unit effect may be executed only once and the continuation chance period may end. Further, in the configuration in which the continuation chance period ends without executing the unit effect after the cancel operation is executed as in (20) above, the continuation chance period ends even in the middle of the opening period. May be good.

(22) When the number of unit effects executed in the continuation chance period reaches the upper limit, the unit effect corresponding to the remaining lottery result data is executed only once and the continuation chance period ends. good. In this case, if the remaining lottery result data includes the continuous winning result, the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is executed only once, and the remaining lottery result data does not include the continuous winning result. The unit effect corresponding to the continuous loss result may be executed only once.

(23) The configuration may be such that the cancellation operation of the continuation chance period is not possible. In this case, the unit effect is executed the same number of times as the number of times the continuous lottery process is executed.

(24) In the fifth embodiment, when the cancellation operation is performed during the continuation chance period, after the cancellation operation in the situation where the data corresponding to the continuous winning result is included in the remaining lottery result data. The content of one unit effect to be executed may have a one-to-one correspondence with the number of data corresponding to the continuous winning result. This makes it possible to grasp the number of times the bonus state is executed after that from the content of the unit effect.

(25) Even if the unit effect corresponding to the continuous winning result is not executed in the continuation chance period, the winning combination is drawn until the ending period is set and the ending period elapses after the last unit effect is executed. The configuration may be such that the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the stop control corresponding to the result of FIG. 10 is executed is maintained is maintained.

(26) If the unit effect corresponding to the winning result is executed during the continuation chance period that occurs in the game that triggers the end of one execution time in the bonus state, the new execution time in the bonus state is started instead of the configuration. For example, the ART state may be started.

(27) In the ART end branch state, the pre-branch condition is satisfied when the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2, and when the pre-branch condition is satisfied, the normal game state and The configuration is such that a branch to any of the new execution times of the ART state can occur, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) for the combination of the main MPU 72 becomes a specific result, the pre-branch condition may be satisfied regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning result. .. Further, for example, the pre-branch condition may be satisfied when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order regardless of the result of the lottery process (FIG. 10) for the combination of the main MPU 72. .. Further, as a result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 10), when the number of digested games after shifting to the ART end branch state reaches the predetermined number of games regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning result. The configuration may be such that the pre-branch condition is satisfied.

(28) In the ART state, the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 in the ART end branch state without satisfying the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state. A configuration in which a condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state can be satisfied in at least one situation before the pre-branch condition is satisfied, when the pre-branch condition is satisfied, and after the pre-branch condition is satisfied. May be. In this case, the game is played while expecting that the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied in the ART end branch state.

(29) After the pre-branch condition is satisfied by shifting the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 in the ART end branch state, the IV in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the 1st RT mode (FIG. 16) is won before the winning is achieved by any of = 19 to 24, a new execution time of the ART state is started. Then, before winning at any of IV = 15-18 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16), winning at any of IV = 19-24 in the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). If this happens, it may be configured to shift to the normal gaming state.

(30) In the ART end branch state, when the winner is won at IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) and when the winner is won at IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). In any case, the notification of the stop order for the effect can be executed, but instead of this, the notification of the stop order for the effect may be executed only in one of them. For example, in the case where the notification of the stop order for staging can be executed only when the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) is won at IV = 25, the lottery of the main MPU 72 is performed in the ART end branch state. Before the pre-branch condition that the mode shifts from the second RT mode ST3 to the first RT mode ST2 is satisfied, is the condition that the notification of the stop order is executed and the condition that a new execution time in the ART state is started is satisfied? It becomes constant regardless of whether or not, and after the above pre-branch condition is satisfied, the frequency at which the stop order notification is executed depends on whether or not the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied. It will fluctuate. As a result, in the situation before the pre-branch condition is satisfied, the player can be expected to start a new execution time of the ART state regardless of the execution frequency of the notification of the stop order, and the pre-branch condition can be set. After the establishment, it is possible to expect the player to start a new execution time of the ART state in relation to the execution frequency of the notification of the stop order.

(31) Even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied, if the lottery mode of the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal mode ST1, the condition disappears and the game becomes the normal game state. It may be a configuration to be migrated.

(32) In the ART end branch state, when winning at IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16) and when winning at IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode (FIG. 18). Instead of a configuration in which the probability that the notification of the stop order for production is executed is higher when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied than when the condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the configuration may be such that both probabilities are the same, and the configuration may be lower when the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied than when the condition is not satisfied.

(33) The probability that the stop order notification is executed in the ART end branch state is higher when the condition for starting a new execution time in the ART state is satisfied than when the condition is not satisfied. Instead of the high configuration, both probabilities may be the same, and the configuration in which the condition for starting a new execution time of the ART state is satisfied is lower than the configuration in which the condition is not satisfied. May be.

(34) Instead of the configuration in which only one lottery mode called the first RT mode ST2 exists between the normal mode ST1 and the second RT mode ST3, a configuration in which a plurality of lottery modes exist may be used, and is usually used. There may be a configuration in which no other lottery mode exists between the mode ST1 and the second RT mode ST3.

(35) The probability of winning at any of IV = 15 to 18 of the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) is set to any of IV = 19 to 24 of the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16). The configuration is not limited to a configuration higher than the probability of winning, and both probabilities may be the same or substantially the same, and any of IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). The probability of winning in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 16) may be lower than the probability of winning in any of IV = 19 to 24.

(36) The type of winning data may be different between IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for normal mode (FIG. 11). Specifically, in IV = 11 to 14, the normal replay winning data and the first special replay winning data are set in common, but the types of winning data set other than that are different. May be good. Further, the winning data types may be different between IV = 15 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 11). Specifically, in IV = 15 to 18, the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set in common, but even if the types of winning data set other than that are different. good. It should be noted that the configuration in which some of the winning data are shared but the types of winning data set as a whole are different is applied to IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). It may be applied to IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16), and may be applied to IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 16). It may be applied to IV = 11 to 14 in the 2RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), may be applied to IV = 16 to 21 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 18), and may be applied to the bonus RT mode lottery. It may be applied to IV = 11 to 16 in the table (FIG. 20).

(37) In the above embodiment, the privilege of paying out the medal when the small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the player is granted some privilege. All you need is. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(38) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT may be applied. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game.

(39) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape, or the like, and even a composite of these can be used to compose the design. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine, or it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused. May be good.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. It is specified that the predetermined conditions (in the first embodiment, winning in any of IV = 7 to 10 in the bonus RT mode ST5, and in the second embodiment, making an affirmative judgment in step S2408) are satisfied. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1105 in the main MPU 72, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2405 in the main MPU 72).
Grant lottery means (first embodiment) that executes a grant lottery process for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition establishment specifying means. Then, the function of executing the process of step S1107 in the main MPU 72, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72).
If the result of the grant lottery process is a grant winning result, the effect content corresponds to winning, and if the result of the grant lottery process is a deviation result, the effect content corresponds to the loss. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1414 in the main MPU 72, and in the second embodiment, of step S2509 and step S2511 in the main MPU 72. A function of executing the process, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2812 and step S2814 in the main MPU 72), and
The hit / fail response effect executed in response to the result of one grant lottery process is collectively executed in the pass / fail period (continuation chance period) for the number of minutes when the execution trigger of the pass / fail response effect occurs. A period setting means (a function for executing a continuation chance period start process and a continuation chance process in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, since the privilege is given when the result of the grant lottery process becomes the grant winning result, the player expects that the grant lottery process is executed and the result becomes the grant winning result. Will be done. In addition, when the grant lottery process is executed, the hit / fail response effect of the effect content corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process is executed, so that the player's expectation can be suitably increased by the pass / fail response effect. Will be.

In this case, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period before the pass / fail period, the pass / fail response effect is not executed, and one execution of the pass / fail response effect for one execution of the grant lottery process is the pass / fail period. Is aggregated and executed in. As a result, it is possible to consolidate the situations in which the player's expectation is raised by the hit / miss response effect in the pass / fail period, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the pass / fail response effect.

In addition, the player pays attention to the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the period before the winning / failing period, and in the winning / failing period, the player is to execute the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result. It will be noticed. As a result, it is possible to make the event that the player pays attention to different depending on the situation, and from this point as well, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, even if the configuration is such that the winning / failing effects are collectively executed during the winning / failing period, the granting lottery process is executed once regardless of whether or not the winning / failing result is obtained during the winning / failing period. The hit / miss response effect is executed once. As a result, the pass / fail response effect can be repeatedly executed during the pass / fail period, and it is possible to repeatedly generate a situation in which the pass / fail response effect is confirmed while expecting it.

From the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. The period setting means is
Even if the execution of the pass / fail response effect for all of the predetermined conditions that have been satisfied by the start of the pass / fail period has not been completed, if the end condition is satisfied, the end of the pass / fail period is terminated. Execution means (function to execute the process of step S1613 in the main MPU 72) and
If the end condition is satisfied and the pass / fail period ends in a situation where the execution of the pass / fail response effect for all of the predetermined conditions that have been satisfied by the start of the pass / fail period is not completed, the next time or later. Carry-over means (winning / failing results 1st to 4th storage areas 101a to 104a) for executing the hit / miss corresponding effect for the unexecuted portion during the hit / miss period, and
The gaming machine according to the feature A1, which is characterized by the above-mentioned feature A1.

According to the feature A2, even if the execution of all the pass / fail response effects is not completed, the pass / fail period ends when the end condition is satisfied, so that the pass / fail period ends at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible. In this case, if the end condition is satisfied and the pass / fail period ends in a situation where the execution of all the pass / fail response effects has not been completed, the pass / fail response effect for the unexecuted portion will be displayed in the next and subsequent pass / fail periods. Will be executed. As a result, even if the end condition is satisfied and the pass / fail period ends in the middle, it is possible to prevent the chance of executing the pass / fail response effect from disappearing.

Feature A3. The end condition is satisfied when the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result is executed.
The game machine according to the feature A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for granting the privilege after the success / failure response effect is executed. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A3, when the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result is executed, the winning / failing period ends and the privilege is given, so that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result and the privilege are given. It becomes easier for the player to understand the relationship between. In this case, even if the winning / failing period ends in the middle of the winning / failing effect due to the configuration of the above feature A2 and the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result, the winning / failing of the unexecuted portion is executed in the next and subsequent winning / failing periods. Since the corresponding effect is executed, even if the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result is executed in the middle, the opportunity to further execute the winning / failing corresponding effect corresponding to the given winning result should not be lost. It will be possible.

Feature A4. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process based on the fact that the condition establishment specifying means has specified that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period.
The predetermined period exists before the pass / fail period, and the predetermined period exists.
When the winning / failing effect corresponding to the grant winning result is executed in the winning / failing period, the predetermined period continues after the end of the winning / failing period.
The carry-over means is continuously executed when the winning / failing effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed and the winning / failing period ends in a situation where the unexecuted portion of the winning / failing effect remains. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the unexecuted portion of the hit / miss corresponding effect is executed at a new execution time of the hit / miss period after the predetermined period.

According to the feature A4, since the pass / fail response effect is executed in the subsequent pass / fail period based on the game content in the predetermined period, the game determines what is the execution trigger of the pass / fail response effect that is collectively executed in the pass / fail period. It becomes easier for the player to recognize, and as a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.

In addition, if the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning / failing result is executed during the winning / failing period, the predetermined period will continue after the end of the winning / failing period. It is expected that the success / failure response effect corresponding to the result will be executed.

In addition, when the winning / failing effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed during the winning / failing period, even if all of the feasible winning / failing effect is not completed, the winning / failing period ends and the predetermined period is set. By executing the game, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize that the occurrence of the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result of the grant has triggered the subsequent predetermined period.

In addition, even if the winning / failing period ends in the middle due to the execution of the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result of the grant, the winning / failing of the unexecuted portion is dealt with in the new execution times of the winning / failing period after the continued predetermined period. Since the effect is executed, even if the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result is executed in the middle, it is possible to prevent the chance of further executing the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result. Will be.

Feature A5. When the winning / failing effect corresponding to the grant winning result is not executed in the winning / failing period, the period setting means has the winning / failing effect for the number of the predetermined conditions established by the start of the winning / failing period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A2 to A4, characterized in that the means for executing the above-mentioned is provided (a function of making a negative determination in step S1605 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature A5, if the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result is not executed, the winning / failing period is not terminated in the middle, and the number of predetermined conditions satisfied by the start of the winning / failing period is several minutes. Since the success / failure response effect of is executed, it becomes easy for the player to understand the contents of the success / failure period.

Feature A6. In the period setting means, the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given lottery process executed at a predetermined timing is higher than the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given lottery process executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing. A means for executing the process first (a function of executing the process of step S1416 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2816 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

According to the feature A6, since each winning / failing effect corresponding to the given lottery process is executed according to the execution order of the given lottery process, the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result occurs at an irregular timing. Become. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to each execution time of the hit / miss response effect.

Feature A7. There are multiple types of the predetermined conditions.
The grant lottery means is characterized in that the grant lottery process is executed so that the probability of the grant winning result differs depending on the type of the predetermined condition that triggered the execution of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A6.

According to the feature A7, since the probability of winning the grant in the grant lottery process differs depending on the type of the predetermined condition, the player not only satisfies the predetermined condition in the period before the winning / failing period, but also. It is expected that a predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the grant lottery process, which has a high probability of winning the grant, will be satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. In the period setting means, the probability of the winning result is the second probability in the winning / failing effect corresponding to the grant lottery process, which is executed so that the probability of the winning result is the first probability. Priority execution means (in the first embodiment, the storage area specifying process in the main MPU 72 is executed) so as to be executed with priority over the hit / fail response effect corresponding to the grant lottery process executed so as to be. The second embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the main MPU 72, and the fourth embodiment has a function of executing the process of step S2810 in the main MPU 72). Feature The gaming machine described in A7.

According to the feature A8, the execution order of the corresponding winning / failing effect is different depending on the probability that the granting winning result is obtained in the granting lottery process. As a result, it is possible to positively create a situation in which the probability of executing the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning / winning result is relatively high in the same winning / failing period, and the player's expectation during the winning / failing period. It is possible to give intonation.

Feature A9. The period setting means is a priority execution means (in the first embodiment) so that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the granting lottery process on the side having a high probability of being a winning result is preferentially executed. A function of executing a storage area specifying process in the main MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2504 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2810 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to the feature A7 or A8, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature A9, it is possible to increase the probability that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result is executed at an early stage.

Feature A10. The period setting means corresponds to the winning result even if the execution of the winning / failing effect for all of the predetermined conditions satisfied by the start of the winning / failing period has not been completed. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which is provided with an end execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1613 in the main MPU 72) for terminating the notification period when the above is executed.

According to the feature A10, when the winning / failing effect corresponding to the granted winning result is executed, the winning / failing period ends in the middle. In this case, when the configuration of the above feature A9 is provided, the probability that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result is executed at an early stage is increased, and the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result is executed. Makes it easier to end the validity period early.

Feature A11. The period setting means corresponds to the winning / failing effect corresponding to each of the given lottery processes in the order in which the given lottery process is executed for the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given lottery process having the same probability of becoming the given winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A8 to A10, characterized in that the above is executed.

According to the feature A11, even if the execution order of the winning / failing effect is determined according to the probability of the winning result, the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result is generated at an irregular timing. It is possible to increase the player's attention to each execution time of the success / failure response effect.

Feature A12. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process at a timing prior to the success / failure period when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine includes result information storage means (hit / fail results 1st to 4th storage areas 101a to 104a) for storing result information corresponding to the result of the given lottery process.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the period setting means is such that the success / failure response effect corresponding to the result information is executed during the success / failure period.

According to the feature A12, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the grant lottery process is executed, the result information is collectively confirmed in the pass / fail period, and the pass / fail response effect is repeatedly executed. As a result, it is possible to disperse the execution timing of the grant lottery process as compared with the configuration in which the grant lottery process is collectively executed during the pass / fail period, so that the processing load does not increase locally during the pass / fail period. It becomes possible to.

Feature A13. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. It is a configuration in which the corresponding profit is given to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the effect execution control means uses the pattern display means to execute the hit / miss response effect.

According to the feature A13, it is possible to execute the success / failure response effect by using the pattern display means for performing the game in the game times.

Feature A14. The effect execution control means is characterized in that when the success / failure corresponding effect is completed, the end mode corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process is displayed by the pattern in the pattern display means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A14, in the pass / fail response effect, the end mode corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process is displayed by the symbol in the pattern display means. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the end timing of one execution time of the corresponding effect and the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the winning / failing corresponding effect of each execution time.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A13 or A14, wherein the effect execution control means ends the hit / miss response effect regardless of the operation of the stop operation means.

According to the feature A15, since the pass / fail response effect ends regardless of the operation of the stop operation means, the processing configuration for executing the pass / fail response effect can be simplified, and the end mode of the pass / fail response effect is predetermined. It is possible to facilitate the control when the end mode is adopted.

Feature A16. The effect execution control means starts the hit / miss response effect when the start operation of the hit / miss response effect is executed by the player, and even when the start restriction period elapses without executing the start operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A15, which is characterized in that a hit / fail response effect is started.

According to the feature A16, when the start operation is executed by the player, the hit / miss response effect is started, so that the hit / miss response effect can be started by the active operation by the player. Further, when the start restriction period has elapsed, the success / failure response effect is forcibly started, so that it is possible to prevent the success / failure period from becoming excessively long.

Feature A17. The effect execution control means executes the pass / fail response effect by causing the variation display of the pattern to be performed in a mode different from the variation display mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A16.

According to the feature A17, in the configuration in which the winning / failing effect is executed by using the pattern display means, the variable display of the pattern in the winning / failing effect is clearly different from the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It is possible to distinguish and make the player recognize it.

Feature A18. The effect execution control means executes the pass / fail response effect by causing the variation display of the pattern to be performed at a speed slower than the variation display speed in the variation display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the combination. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A17, characterized in that the game is to be played.

According to the feature A18, the player who is accustomed to the variable display speed of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination clearly recognizes the difference when confirming the variable display of the pattern in the winning / failing effect. Will be done. In addition, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the variable display speed of the pattern changes.

Feature A19. In the effect execution control means, when the hit / fail response effect is started, a situation in which the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means is a predetermined pre-start mode (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is arranged at a standby position). The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A18, which is characterized in that the variable display of the pattern is started in the situation).

According to the feature A19, by unifying the stop mode of the pattern before the start of the hit / miss response effect to the predetermined pre-start mode, the pass / fail response effect is to be started and the pass / fail response effect is started. Can be clearly recognized by the player.

Feature A20. It is provided with a pre-start notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1309 in the main MPU 72) to execute a notification for the player to recognize that the pass / fail period is started in the pre-start notification period. ,
The period setting means is such that the success / failure response effect is started after the pre-start notification period ends.
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the effect execution control means is such that the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means becomes the predetermined pre-start mode during the pre-start notification period.

According to the feature A20, the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means is adjusted to a predetermined pre-start mode by utilizing the period in which the notification for making the player recognize that the hit / miss response effect is started is executed. It becomes possible.

Feature A21. The pre-start notification period is set as a fixed period.
Described in feature A20, wherein the maximum period assumed as a period required for the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to be the predetermined pre-start mode is equal to or less than the pre-start notification period. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A21, in the configuration in which the pre-start notification period is set to a fixed period to simplify the processing configuration for setting the end trigger of the pre-start notification period and specifying the end trigger, the pre-start notification period Within the range of, it is possible to adjust the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means to a predetermined pre-start mode.

Feature A22. The effect execution control means is
When the winning / failing effect ends in the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result, the means for displaying the winning mode of stopping by the symbol in the pattern displaying means (in the first embodiment). A function to execute the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, a function to execute the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2814 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. )When,
In the hit / fail response effect corresponding to the deviation result, when the hit / fail response effect ends, the means for making the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means the predetermined pre-start mode (in the first embodiment). A function to execute the process of step S1412 in the main MPU 72, a function to execute the process of step S2509 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2812 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. )When,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A19 to A21.

According to the feature A22, in the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result, the player clearly recognizes that the winning result is obtained because the stopping mode of the pattern in the pattern display means is the stopping mode corresponding to the winning. It is possible to make it. On the other hand, in the success / failure response effect corresponding to the deviation result, the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means becomes a predetermined pre-start mode, which not only makes the player clearly recognize that the deviation result has occurred. Even if a new execution time of the success / failure response effect is subsequently started, it is not necessary to adjust the stop mode of the pattern.

Feature A23. The effect execution control means is the pattern display means so that a predetermined pattern or a predetermined combination of patterns stops on a predetermined line when the winning / failing effect ends in the winning / failing effect corresponding to the given winning result. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the main A function to execute the process of step S2814 in the side MPU 72) is provided.
The predetermined pre-start aspect is the predetermined pattern or the predetermined pattern when one pattern is moved toward the predetermined line in one pattern display area in the pattern display means or in each of the plurality of pattern display areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A22, wherein the pattern combination of the above is a mode of stopping on the predetermined line.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the pattern in the hit / miss response effect, and it is possible to shorten the digestion time in each execution time of the hit / miss response effect.

Feature A24. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A normal game operation in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so as to be performed, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. It is a configuration in which the corresponding profit is given to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A23, wherein the success / failure period proceeds in a restricted state in which the start or progress of the normal gaming operation is restricted.

According to the feature A24, since the success / failure period is performed in a state where the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the success / failure period.

Feature A25. The period setting means makes a negative determination in the period extension means (step S1605 in the main MPU 72) for extending the pass / fail period when the hit / miss response effect is newly started in the pass / fail period. The gaming machine according to feature A24, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S1606 or later).

According to the feature A25, the pass / fail period is extended when the pass / fail response effect is newly started. Therefore, at the start of the pass / fail period, the entire continuation period of the current pass / fail period can be calculated, or the current pass / fail period can be calculated. There is no need to specify the end timing of the usage period in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the pass / fail period.

Feature A26. The gaming machine according to feature A25, wherein the effect execution control means starts the hit / miss response effect when the start operation of the hit / miss response effect is executed.

According to the feature A26, when the start operation is executed by the player, the hit / miss response effect is started, so that the hit / miss response effect can be started by the active operation by the player. Further, even if the start timing of the hit / miss response effect is irregularly determined in this way, the continuation period of the pass / fail period is extended when it is determined that the hit / miss response effect is newly started. Therefore, it is possible to make the duration appropriate.

Feature A27. The period setting means causes the hit / fail period to start after the start condition of the game times in which the normal game operation is executed is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A26, wherein after the applicable disapproval period ends, the stop result of the variation display of the pattern due to the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is displayed.

According to the feature A27, the stop result of the change display of the pattern due to the normal game operation of the corresponding game times is displayed after the right / wrong period ends, so that the right / wrong period has ended through the operation of the picture display means. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize it. Further, in the configuration in which the winning / failing effect is executed by using the pattern display means, the player is informed that the stopping mode of the pattern corresponding to the winning / failing effect is different from the stopping mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to feature A27, wherein the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is started after the success / failure period ends.

According to the feature A28, since the normal game operation is started after the hit / miss period ends, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the hit / miss period has ended. In addition, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the execution of the normal game operation as compared with the configuration in which the pass / fail period is executed in the middle of the normal game operation.

Feature A29. A state setting means for setting a predetermined game state in which the game times in which the normal game operation is executed are executed a plurality of times, and ending the predetermined game state when the game times that trigger the end in the predetermined game state are executed. Equipped with (a function to execute bonus RT management processing in the main MPU72)
The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A28, wherein the period setting means generates the winning / failing period in the gaming times that trigger the end.

According to the feature A29, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game times that trigger the end of the predetermined game state.

Feature A30. Without reducing the number of times the grant lottery process is executed and the number of times the privilege corresponding to the grant winning result is granted, the execution of the subsequent success / failure response effect in the success / failure period is stopped and the success / failure period is terminated. And, it is provided with a predetermined setting means (a function of executing a cancellation process in the main MPU 72) for limiting execution, which is one of reducing the number of times of the success / failure response effect executed in the success / failure period. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A29.

According to the feature A30, it is possible to prevent the number of times of the hit / miss response effect performed during the hit / miss period from becoming unnecessarily large. In addition, even if such execution restrictions are applied, the number of times the grant lottery process is executed and the number of times the privilege corresponding to the grant winning result is granted do not decrease, so that the player's profit is not lost, and the result is rejected. It is possible to prevent the number of times of the hit / miss response effect performed during the period from becoming larger than necessary.

It should be noted that the configuration of "when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting means, the continuation period of the success / failure period is shorter than when the execution restriction does not occur" is applied to the configuration of the feature A30. You may. As a result, it is possible to prevent the duration of the pass / fail period from being fixed as it is, even though the execution restriction of the pass / fail response effect has occurred.

Feature A31. The gaming machine according to feature A30, wherein the predetermined setting means performs the execution restriction based on the predetermined response operation performed by the player.

According to the feature A31, for a player who does not want the hit / miss response effect to be repeatedly executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of the hit / fail response effect during the pass / fail period by the player's own choice. ..

Feature A32. When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means causes the player to be able to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the success / failure response effect that is the target of the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to the feature A30 or A31.

According to the feature A32, even if the execution restriction of the hit / miss response effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the pass / fail response effect that is the target of the execution restriction. Become.

Feature A33. When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means depends on whether or not the grant winning result is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the winning / failing response effect subject to the execution restriction. Or, to ensure that different effects are executed according to the number of the given winning results included in the result of the given lottery process corresponding to the winning / failing effect subject to the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to the feature A32.

According to the feature A33, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the grant winning result even when the execution restriction of the winning / failing effect is generated.

As a more specific configuration of the feature A33, "when the predetermined setting means performs the execution restriction, the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the success / failure response effect subject to the execution restriction is obtained. When the number of the granted winning results included in the result is the first reference number of 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed, and the hit / fail response effect subject to the execution restriction is applied. When the number of the grant winning results included in the result of the corresponding grant lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed. Is conceivable.

Feature A34. The gaming machine according to any one of features A30 to A33, wherein the predetermined setting means causes the predetermined effect to be executed in a mode different from that of the hit / miss corresponding effect when the execution is restricted.

According to the feature A34, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution restriction of the hit / miss corresponding effect has occurred by executing the predetermined effect in a mode different from the hit / miss corresponding effect.

Feature A35. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. It is a configuration in which the corresponding profit is given to the player,
The effect execution control means uses the pattern display means to execute the effect corresponding to the result.
The gaming machine according to feature A34, wherein the predetermined setting means uses an effect executing means different from the pattern display means to execute the predetermined effect.

According to the feature A35, it is possible to execute the winning / failing effect by using the pattern display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed by using an effect execution means different from the pattern display means, it is clear to the player that the execution restriction of the effect corresponding to the result is generated through the difference in the effect execution means. Can be recognized by.

Feature A36. The predetermined setting means is such that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the lottery results is collectively executed once for the plurality of lottery results of the given lottery process, so that the winning / failing period The gaming machine according to any one of features A30 to A35, which is characterized in that the number of times of the success / failure corresponding effect to be executed is reduced.

According to the feature A36, when the number of times of the winning / failing effect is reduced, one winning / failing effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process, so that the number of times of the winning / failing effect is reduced. Even when the above occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the winning / failing effect that has been reduced by executing the winning / failing effect.

Feature A37. The predetermined setting means is
A result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can trigger the execution of the pass / fail response effect during the pass / fail period (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72. In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, The function of executing the processes of steps S3002 and S3003 in the main MPU 72) and
When the winning result is confirmed by the result confirmation means, the winning / failing effect corresponding to the winning result is provided as the winning / failing effect corresponding to the lottery result of the given lottery process that has been confirmed so far. Aggregation execution means to be executed once (a function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment). A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of step S2908 and step S2911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S3009, step S3011 and step S3012 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A36, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A37, when the number of times of the winning / failing effect is reduced, the execution of the winning / failing effect corresponding to the deviation result that is the confirmation target is omitted by the time the granting winning result is confirmed, and the granting is won. The pass / fail response effect corresponding to the result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the winning / failing effect while making the player clearly recognize that the result is the winning result.

Feature A38. When the result confirmation means does not confirm the winning result, the aggregation executing means corresponds to the lottery result of all the granting lottery processes that can trigger the execution of the winning / failing effect during the winning / failing period. The gaming machine according to feature A37, wherein the hit / fail response effect corresponding to the deviation result is executed once as the corresponding effect.

According to the feature A38, when the number of times of the winning / failing effect is reduced and the winning result is not confirmed, the winning / failing effect corresponding to the losing result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the winning / failing effect while clearly recognizing that the winning result was not obtained.

Feature A39. Aggregation execution means (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72) so that the winning / failing effect corresponding to the lottery results is collectively executed for the plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The function of executing the process of step S1706 and step S1709, the function of executing the process of step S2606 and step S2609 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment, and the function of step S2908 and step S2911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment. Described in any one of the features A1 to A38, which comprises a function of executing the process, and in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3009, step S3011 and step S3012 in the main MPU 72). Gaming machine.

According to the feature A39, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the hit / miss response effect that occurs during the pass / fail period as needed.

Feature A40. It is equipped with a game rotation control means (a function to execute normal processing in the main MPU 72) that controls execution of a game rotation operation in a game execution means based on a player's operation in each game time.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the content of the gaming times.

According to the feature A40, since the predetermined condition is satisfied according to the content of the game round, the player pays attention to the content of the game round in the period before the win / fail period, and the grant is won in the win / fail period. The player will pay attention to the fact that the success / failure response effect corresponding to the result is executed.

Feature A41. The grant lottery means executes the grant lottery process based on the fact that the condition establishment specifying means has specified that the predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined period.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, characterized in that the predetermined period exists before the success / failure period.

According to the feature A41, since the pass / fail response effect is executed in the subsequent pass / fail period based on the game content in the predetermined period, the game determines what is the execution trigger of the pass / fail response effect that is collectively executed in the pass / fail period. It becomes easier for the player to recognize, and as a result, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined period.

Feature A42. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A41, wherein the duration of the pass / fail period varies depending on the number of times of the pass / fail response effect performed in the pass / fail period.

According to the feature A42, the duration of each pass / fail response effect is not adjusted according to the number of executions of the pass / fail response effect within a certain range of the pass / fail period, and the number of executions of the pass / fail response effect is not adjusted. The duration of the pass / fail period varies depending on the number of times the corresponding effect is executed. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is increased with respect to the content of the pass / fail response effect of each execution time and the number of times of the pass / fail response effect executed during the pass / fail period.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A42, one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A normal game operation in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so as to be performed, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. In a gaming machine where the corresponding profit is given to the player
With the specific state setting means (function for executing the start process and the continuation chance process in the main MPU 72) to set the specific game state (continuation chance period) in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted). ,
An effect execution control means for executing a unit effect each time an execution trigger occurs in the specific game state (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1414 in the main MPU 72, second In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2812 and S2814 in the main MPU 72).
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the duration of the specific gaming state varies depending on the number of times of the unit effect executed in the specific gaming state.

According to the feature B1, since the unit effect is executed in a state where the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the unit effect. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the duration of each unit effect is not adjusted according to the number of times the unit effect is executed within the range where the duration of the specific game state is fixed, or the number of times the unit effect is executed is not adjusted. The duration of the specific gaming state changes according to the number of times the game is executed. As a result, the degree of freedom in design is increased with respect to the content of the unit effect of each execution time and the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state.

In addition, in the configuration of the above feature B1, the configuration is provided with "a privilege granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) for granting a privilege corresponding to the content of the unit effect to the player". May be applied.

Feature B2. A period extension means for extending the duration of the specific gaming state when it is determined to newly start the unit effect in the specific gaming state (a negative determination is made in step S1605 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing processing after step S1606.

According to the feature B2, when it is decided that the unit effect is newly started, the duration of the specific gaming state is extended. Therefore, when the specific gaming state is started, the entire duration of the specific gaming state is set. There is no need to calculate or specify the end timing of the specific game state this time in advance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the specific gaming state.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the effect execution control means starts the unit effect when the start operation of the unit effect is executed.

According to the feature B3, the unit effect is started when the start operation is executed by the player, so that the unit effect can be started by the active operation by the player. Further, even if the start timing of the unit effect is irregularly determined in this way, the duration of the specific gaming state is extended when it is determined that the unit effect is newly started. It will be possible to make the duration appropriate.

Feature B4. The specific state setting means causes the specific game state to start after the start condition of the game times in which the normal game operation is executed is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein after the end of the specific gaming state, the stop result of the variation display of the pattern due to the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is displayed.

According to the feature B4, the stop result of the change display of the pattern due to the normal game operation of the corresponding game times is displayed after the specific game state is completed, so that the end of the specific game state is indicated through the operation of the pattern display means. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize it. Further, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed by using the pattern display means, the player is made to recognize that the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the unit effect is different from the stop mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It becomes possible.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the normal gaming operation of the corresponding gaming times is started after the specific gaming state is completed.

According to the feature B5, since the normal gaming operation is started after the specific gaming state ends, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific gaming state has ended. Further, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the execution of the normal game operation as compared with the configuration in which the specific game state is started in the middle of the normal game operation.

Feature B6. A predetermined state is set in which the game times in which the normal game operation is executed are executed a plurality of times, and the predetermined game state is terminated when the game times that trigger the end in the predetermined game state are executed. Equipped with means (a function to execute bonus RT management processing in the main MPU72)
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the specific state setting means generates the specific gaming state at the gaming times that trigger the end.

According to the feature B6, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game times that trigger the end of the predetermined game state.

Feature B7. An execution restriction that either stops the subsequent execution of the unit effect in the specific game state to end the specific game state or reduces the number of times the unit effect is executed in the specific game state. It is equipped with a predetermined setting means (a function to execute a cancellation process on the main MPU 72).
The game according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting means, the duration of the specific gaming state is shorter than when the execution restriction does not occur. Machine.

According to the feature B7, it is possible to prevent the number of unit effects executed in the specific gaming state from becoming unnecessarily large. In this case, if the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, the duration of the specific gaming state is shortened, so that the continuation period of the specific gaming state is fixed as it is even though the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B7, wherein the predetermined setting means performs the execution restriction based on the predetermined response operation performed by the player.

According to the feature B8, the player who does not want the unit effect to be repeatedly executed can limit the execution of the unit effect in the specific game state by the player's own selection. Further, it is highly possible that the player who does not want the unit effect to be repeatedly executed in this way wants to end the specific game state at an early stage. On the other hand, when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, it is possible to shorten the duration of the specific gaming state.

Feature B9. The effect execution control means is such that the unit effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process.
When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means makes it possible to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to the feature B7 or B8.

According to the feature B9, even when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction.

Feature B10. When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means determines whether or not the grant winning result is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. Alternatively, it is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the number of grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. Feature The gaming machine described in B9.

According to the feature B10, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the winning result even when the execution of the unit effect is restricted.

As a more specific configuration of the feature B10, "In the case where the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. When the number of the granted winning results included in is the first reference number of 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed, and the unit effect subject to the execution restriction is supported. When the number of the grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed. " The configuration is conceivable.

Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B10, wherein the predetermined setting means performs a predetermined effect different from the unit effect when the execution is restricted.

According to the feature B11, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred by executing the predetermined effect in a mode different from the unit effect.

Feature B12. The effect execution control means uses the pattern display means to execute the unit effect.
The gaming machine according to feature B11, wherein the predetermined setting means uses an effect executing means different from the pattern display means to execute the predetermined effect.

According to the feature B12, it is possible to execute the unit effect by using the pattern display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed by using an effect execution means different from the pattern display means, it is clear to the player that the execution restriction of the unit effect is generated through the difference in the effect execution means. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature B13. The effect execution control means is such that the unit effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process.
The predetermined setting means is executed in the specific gaming state by causing the unit effects corresponding to the lottery results to be collectively executed for the plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12, characterized in that the number of times of the unit production is reduced.

According to the feature B13, when the number of unit effects is reduced, one unit effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process, so that the number of unit effects is reduced. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of reduction through the execution of the unit effect.

Feature B14. The predetermined setting means is
A result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can trigger the execution of the unit effect in the specific game state (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72, the first In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the main The function of executing the processes of steps S3002 and S3003 in the side MPU 72) and
When the award winning result is confirmed by the result confirmation means, the unit effect corresponding to the award winning result is executed once as the unit effect corresponding to the lottery result of the award lottery process which has been confirmed so far. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72, and in the third embodiment, the processes of steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72 are executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S2908 and S2911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and the function to execute the processing of steps S3009, S3011 and S3012 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment). When,
The gaming machine according to feature B13, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature B14, when the number of times of the unit effect is reduced, the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the deviated result that is the confirmation target is omitted until the grant winning result is confirmed, and the grant winning result is obtained. The corresponding unit effect is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit staging while clearly recognizing that the result of the winning is given to the player.

Feature B15. The aggregate execution means corresponds to the lottery results of all the grant lottery processes that can trigger the execution of the unit effect in the specific gaming state when the grant winning result is not confirmed by the result confirmation means. The gaming machine according to feature B14, wherein the unit effect corresponding to the deviation result is executed once.

According to the feature B15, when the number of unit effects is reduced and the winning result is not confirmed, the unit effect corresponding to the out-of-order result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit productions while making the player clearly recognize that the result of the winning is not obtained.

It should be noted that one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 are configured with respect to the configurations of the features B1 to B15. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Grant lottery means for executing the grant lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S1107 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment), and
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player according to the result of the grant lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72) and
The effect execution control means (in the first embodiment, the main side) so that the unit effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process each time an execution opportunity occurs in the specific game state (continuation chance period). A function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1414 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processes of steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment, and steps S2812 and steps in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment. Function to execute the processing of S2814) and
In the specific gaming state, the execution of the subsequent unit effect in the specific gaming state is stopped to end the specific gaming state without affecting the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the grant content of the privilege. A predetermined setting means (a function of executing a cancellation process in the main MPU 72) for limiting execution, which is one of reducing the number of times the unit effect is executed, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the player pays attention to the unit effect by executing the unit effect corresponding to the result of the grant lottery process in the specific game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, since the subsequent execution of the unit effect in the specific game state can be stopped or the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state can be reduced, the number of unit effects executed in the specific game state can be reduced. Can be prevented from becoming more than necessary. Further, even when such an execution restriction is applied, since the number of executions of the grant lottery process and the grant content of the privilege are not affected, the execution is performed in the specific game state while not losing the profit of the player. It is possible to prevent the number of unit productions from becoming more than necessary.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein when the execution restriction is executed by the predetermined setting means, the duration of the specific gaming state is shorter than when the execution restriction does not occur.

According to the feature C2, it is possible to prevent the duration of the specific gaming state from being fixed as it is even though the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined setting means performs the execution restriction based on the predetermined response operation performed by the player.

According to the feature C3, the player who does not want the unit effect to be repeatedly executed can be restricted from executing the unit effect in the specific game state by the player's own selection.

Feature C4. When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means makes it possible to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of the execution restriction. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

According to the feature C4, even when the execution restriction of the unit effect occurs, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction.

Feature C5. When the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means determines whether or not the grant winning result is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. Alternatively, it is characterized in that different effects are executed according to the number of grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. Feature The gaming machine described in C4.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of occurrences of the winning result even when the execution of the unit effect is restricted.

As a more specific configuration of the feature C5, "In the case where the execution restriction is performed, the predetermined setting means is included in the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect subject to the execution restriction. When the number of the granted winning results included in is the first reference number of 1 or more, the first reference effect is executed, and the unit effect subject to the execution restriction is supported. When the number of the grant winning results included in the result of the grant lottery process is the second reference number larger than the first reference number, the second reference effect is executed. " The configuration is conceivable.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined setting means performs a predetermined effect different from the unit effect when the execution is restricted.

According to the feature C6, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the execution restriction of the unit effect has occurred by executing the predetermined effect in a mode different from the unit effect.

Feature C7. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. It is a configuration in which the corresponding profit is given to the player,
The effect execution control means uses the pattern display means to execute the unit effect.
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the predetermined setting means uses an effect executing means different from the pattern display means to execute the predetermined effect.

According to the feature C7, it is possible to execute the unit effect by using the pattern display means. In this case, since the predetermined effect is executed by using an effect execution means different from the pattern display means, it is clear to the player that the execution restriction of the unit effect is generated through the difference in the effect execution means. It becomes possible to recognize.

Feature C8. The predetermined setting means is executed in the specific gaming state by causing the unit effects corresponding to the lottery results to be collectively executed for the plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that the number of times of the unit production is reduced.

According to the feature C8, when the number of unit effects is reduced, one unit effect is executed for a plurality of lottery results of the grant lottery process, so that the number of unit effects is reduced. Even in this case, it is possible to make the player recognize the result of the grant lottery process corresponding to the unit effect that is the target of reduction through the execution of the unit effect.

Feature C9. The predetermined setting means is
A result confirmation means for sequentially confirming the result of the grant lottery process that can trigger the execution of the unit effect in the specific game state (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1702 and S1703 in the main MPU 72, the first In the third embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 and S2602 in the main MPU 72, in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the main The function of executing the processes of steps S3002 and S3003 in the side MPU 72) and
When the award winning result is confirmed by the result confirmation means, the unit effect corresponding to the award winning result is executed once as the unit effect corresponding to the lottery result of the award lottery process which has been confirmed so far. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1709 in the main MPU 72, and in the third embodiment, the processes of steps S2606 and S2609 in the main MPU 72 are executed. Function to execute the processing of steps S2908 and S2911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and the function to execute the processing of steps S3009, S3011 and S3012 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment). When,
The gaming machine according to the feature C8, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature C9, when the number of times of the unit effect is reduced, the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the defeated result that is the confirmation target is omitted until the grant winning result is confirmed, and the grant winning result is obtained. The corresponding unit effect is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit staging while making the player clearly recognize that the result of the winning is given.

Feature C10. The aggregate execution means corresponds to the lottery results of all the grant lottery processes that can trigger the execution of the unit effect in the specific gaming state when the grant winning result is not confirmed by the result confirmation means. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the unit effect corresponding to the deviation result is executed once.

According to the feature C10, when the number of unit effects is reduced and the winning result is not confirmed, the unit effect corresponding to the out-of-order result is executed once. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of unit productions while making the player clearly recognize that the result of the winning is not obtained.

It should be noted that one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 are configured with respect to the configurations of the features C1 to C10. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
A normal game operation in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so as to be performed, and
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the normal game operation is executed at each game time.
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. In a gaming machine where the corresponding profit is given to the player
A predetermined state setting means (a function of executing bonus RT management processing in the main MPU 72) for terminating one execution time of the predetermined game state when the game time that triggers the end is executed in the predetermined game state, and
Execution determining means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1107 in the main MPU 72, second In the embodiment of the above, the function of executing the process of step S2507 in the main MPU 72) and
With the specific state setting means (function for executing the start process and the continuation chance process in the main MPU 72) to set the specific game state (continuation chance period) in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted). ,
When it is determined by the execution determining means to grant the privilege to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the pattern display is performed in the specific gaming state started before the privilege is granted. An effect execution control means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1412 and S1414 in the main MPU 72, second In the embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2509 and S2511 in the main MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2812 and S2814 in the main MPU 72).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, when the privilege is granted after the end of one execution of the predetermined gaming state, a specific gaming state in which the start or progress of the normal gaming operation is restricted occurs before the privilege is granted. , The unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed by the pattern display means in the specific game state. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the unit production corresponding to the grant result will be executed in the predetermined game state, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed by using the pattern display means, it is possible to prevent the player who is paying attention to the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means from overlooking the unit effect. ..

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific state setting means is set to the specific gaming state in the gaming round that triggers the end or the next gaming round.

According to the feature D2, since the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed immediately before the privilege is granted, the execution of the unit effect corresponding to the grant result corresponds to the grant of the privilege after the end of one execution of the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize what he / she is doing.

Feature D3. The specific state setting means causes the specific game state to start at the game times that trigger the end.
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein after the end of the specific gaming state, the stop result of the variation display of the pattern due to the normal gaming operation of the gaming times that triggers the end is displayed.

According to the feature D3, the pattern display means indicates that the specific game state has ended by displaying the stop result of the change display of the pattern due to the normal game operation of the game times that triggers the end after the specific game state ends. It becomes possible to make the player clearly recognize through the movement. Further, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed by using the pattern display means, the player is made to recognize that the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the unit effect is different from the stop mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein after the end of the specific gaming state, the normal gaming operation of the gaming times that triggers the termination is started.

According to the feature D4, since the normal gaming operation is started after the specific gaming state ends, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific gaming state has ended. Further, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the execution of the normal game operation as compared with the configuration in which the specific game state is started in the middle of the normal game operation.

Feature D5. The execution determining means has one of the features D1 to D4, which is characterized in that it determines whether or not to start a new execution time of the predetermined gaming state after one execution time of the predetermined gaming state is completed. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature D5, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation that a new execution round of the predetermined gaming state is started.

Feature D6. When the execution determination means does not determine that the player is to be given a privilege after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the effect execution control means has the same pattern display means in the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that a unit effect corresponding to a deviation result is executed by using a pattern.

According to the feature D6, since the unit effect is executed even when the privilege is not given after one execution of the predetermined game state is completed, it is possible to increase the chances that the unit effect is executed.

Feature D7. The effect execution control means is characterized in that when the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is completed, the stop result corresponding to the grant result is displayed by the symbol in the symbol display means. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature D7, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the end timing of one execution of the unit effect and the decision content corresponding to the unit effect in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed by using the pattern display means. Become.

Feature D8. The effect execution control means is such that the unit effect is executed by causing the variable display of the pattern to be performed in a mode different from the variable display mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

According to the feature D8, in the configuration in which the unit effect is executed by using the pattern display means, the variable display of the pattern in the unit effect is clearly distinguished from the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it.

Feature D9. The effect execution control means executes the unit effect by making the variable display of the pattern performed at a speed slower than the variable display speed in the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to the feature D9, the player who is accustomed to the variable display speed of the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination clearly recognizes the difference when confirming the variable display of the pattern in the unit production. It will be. In addition, it is possible to give the player the unexpectedness that the variable display speed of the pattern changes.

Feature D10. When the unit effect is started, the effect execution control means has a situation in which the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means is a predetermined pre-start mode (a situation in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged in a standby position). ), The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized in that the variable display of the pattern is started.

According to the feature D10, the player indicates that the unit effect is to be started and that the unit effect is started by unifying the stop mode of the pattern before the unit effect is started to the predetermined pre-start mode. Can be clearly recognized.

Feature D11. It is provided with a pre-start notification control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1309 in the main MPU 72) to execute a notification for causing the player to recognize that the specific gaming state is started in the pre-start notification period. ,
The effect execution control means is intended to start the unit effect after the pre-start notification period ends, and the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means in the pre-start notification period is the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to feature D10, which is characterized in that it is in a pre-start mode.

According to the feature D11, the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means is adjusted to a predetermined pre-start mode by utilizing the period in which the notification for making the player recognize that the unit effect is started is executed. Is possible.

Feature D12. The pre-start notification period is set as a fixed period.
Described in feature D11, the longest period assumed as the period required for the pattern stop mode in the pattern display means to be the predetermined pre-start mode is equal to or less than the pre-start notification period. Gaming machine.

According to the feature D12, in the configuration in which the processing configuration is simplified for setting and specifying the end trigger of the pre-start notification period by setting the pre-start notification period to a certain period, within the range of the pre-start notification period. It is possible to adjust the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means to a predetermined pre-start mode.

Feature D13. The effect execution control means is
In the unit effect corresponding to the grant result, when the unit effect ends, the stop mode of the grant correspondence is displayed by the pattern after the variable display of the pattern is performed from the situation which is the predetermined pre-start mode. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the main (Function to execute the process of step S2814 in the side MPU 72) and
When it is not determined by the execution determining means to grant the privilege to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the variation display of the pattern is performed from the situation which is the predetermined pre-start mode. After that, a means for making the stop mode of the pattern the predetermined pre-start mode (a function of executing the process of step S1412 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment). A function of executing the process of step S2509, a function of executing the process of step S2812 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D12.

According to the feature D13, in the unit production corresponding to the grant result, the stop mode of the symbol in the symbol display means becomes the stop mode corresponding to the grant, so that the privilege is granted after one execution of the predetermined game state is completed. Can be clearly recognized by the player. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the privilege is granted, the player stops the pattern in the pattern display means by returning to the predetermined pre-start mode, so that the privilege is not determined. Not only is it clearly recognized, but it is not necessary to adjust the stop mode of the pattern even when a new execution time of the unit effect is started thereafter.

Feature D14. The effect execution control means is a means for controlling the pattern display means so that a predetermined pattern or a predetermined combination of patterns stops on a predetermined line when the unit effect ends in the unit effect corresponding to the grant result. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the step in the main MPU 72. It has a function to execute the processing of S2814).
The predetermined pre-start aspect is the predetermined pattern or the predetermined pattern when one pattern is moved toward the predetermined line in one pattern display area in the pattern display means or in each of the plurality of pattern display areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D13, wherein the pattern combination of the above is a mode of stopping on the predetermined line.

According to the feature D14, it is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the pattern in the unit effect, and it is possible to shorten the digestion time in each execution time of the unit effect.

Feature D15. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, wherein the effect execution control means ends the unit effect regardless of the operation of the stop operation means.

According to the feature D15, since the unit effect ends irrespective of the operation of the stop operation means, the processing configuration for executing the unit effect is simplified, and the end mode of the unit effect is set to a predetermined end mode. When this is done, control is facilitated.

Feature D16. The effect execution control means starts the unit effect when the start operation of the unit effect is executed by the player, and even when the start restriction period elapses without executing the start operation, the unit effect The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, characterized in that

According to the feature D16, the unit effect is started when the start operation is executed by the player, so that the unit effect can be started by the active operation by the player. Further, since the unit effect is forcibly started when the start restriction period has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from becoming excessively long.

It should be noted that one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 are configured with respect to the configurations of the features D1 to D16. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A game turn control means (a function to execute a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls execution of a game turn operation in the game execution means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) based on a player's operation in each game turn.
Execution times ending means (in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution time in the special game state when the game times that trigger the end are executed in the special game state (ART state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. (Function to execute the process of step S2025) and
A branch state setting means (a function for executing ART end branch processing in the main MPU 72) for setting a continuous branch state (ART end branch state) when one execution of the special game state is completed, and
A normal transition means for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (establishment of the first fall replay winning) in a situation where branching is possible in the continuous branching state (first RT mode ST2). (Function to execute the process of step S2112 in the main MPU 72) and
In the special transition means (in the main MPU 72) that starts a new execution round of the special gaming state when the special transition condition is satisfied (establishment of the second RT replay winning) in the situation where the branch is possible in the continuous branch state. (Function to execute the process of step S2108) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, even if a new execution time of the special game state is started after that, the state shifts to the continuous branching state. As a result, the player expects that a new execution time of the special game state is started in the continuous branch state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the continuous branching state, the branching is possible regardless of whether a new execution round of the special gaming state is started or a transition to the normal gaming state occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the progress mode of the continuous branching state halfway common regardless of whether a new execution round of the special gaming state is started or a transition to the normal gaming state occurs. Will be. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation that a new execution round of the special gaming state will be started.

Feature E2. In the special transition means, the special transition condition is satisfied in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied and the branch is possible in the continuous branch state. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that a new execution round of the special gaming state is started in the case of the case.

According to the feature E2, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special game state is satisfied, when one execution time in the special game state is completed, the state shifts to the continuous branching state. As a result, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special game state is not satisfied, the player can be expected to start a new execution time in the special game state in the continuous branching state. It will be possible.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state can be satisfied before the transition to the continuous branching state occurs.

According to the feature E3, even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied in the special game state, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, the state shifts to the continuous branching state. do. As a result, even if the condition for starting a new execution time in the special game state is not satisfied, the player can be expected to start a new execution time in the special game state in the continuous branching state. It will be possible.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the continuous branching state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

According to the feature E4, it may be advantageous for the player if the continuous branching state continues. In this case, even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, the transition to the continuous branching state is performed, and then the new execution time of the special game state is renewed. By starting the new execution times, it is possible to further increase the advantage when the condition for starting the new execution times in the special gaming state is satisfied.

Feature E5. The feature is that the expected number of game media acquired per unit game round is not less than the expected number of game media acquired per unit game round in the special gaming state, at least until the branchable state is reached in the continuous branching state. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E4.

According to the feature E5, it may be advantageous for the player if the continuous branching state continues. In this case, even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, the transition to the continuous branching state is performed, and then the new execution time of the special game state is renewed. By starting the new execution times, it is possible to further increase the advantage when the condition for starting the new execution times in the special gaming state is satisfied.

Feature E6. The branchable state is characterized in that the result of the lottery process is the result of the branch transition correspondence (IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode) as at least one condition. The gaming machine according to any one of E5.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to make the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branching state irregular. In particular, when the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E4 or the above-mentioned feature E5 is provided, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continuous branching state. Therefore, in the continuous branching state, the player has a new execution time of the special gaming state. Not only will the game be started, but the game will be played with the expectation that a branchable state will not occur, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the occurrence of the branchable state is avoided when the transition avoidance operation is performed by the player.

According to the feature E7, since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the branchable state depending on the operation mode of the player, it is possible to make the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branching state irregular. .. In particular, when the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E4 or the above-mentioned feature E5 is provided, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continuous branching state. Therefore, in the continuous branching state, the player has a new execution time of the special gaming state. Not only will the game be started, but the game will be played with the expectation that the occurrence of a branchable state will be avoided, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E8. In a situation where the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied, if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the branchable state occurs in the continuous branching state, the normal transition means is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein the transition to the normal gaming state is not performed.

According to the feature E8, even if the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, in the configuration of transitioning to the continuous branching state, even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the situation. Since the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while not losing the benefit of starting a new execution round of the special gaming state.

Feature E9. The feature is that it is provided with an output means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the main MPU 72) that outputs a specific output to the outside of the gaming machine when a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E8.

According to the feature E9, since the specific output is performed when the transition to the special transition state is performed, it is possible to make the device outside the gaming machine grasp that the execution times of the special gaming state are newly generated. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E1 is provided, and when the branchable state → the special gaming state is changed in the continuous branching state, a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. As a result, even when one execution round of the special gaming state ends and a new execution round of the special gaming state is started, a specific output is performed at the start of each execution round of the special gaming state. This makes it possible to individually grasp each of these execution times in a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature E10. A function of executing the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72 to start a new execution round of the special gaming state without shifting to the continuous branching state when one execution round of the special gaming state is completed. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

According to the feature E10, when the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied, when one execution time of the special game state is completed, the new execution time of the special game state is changed after the transition to the continuous branch state. There are cases where the execution times are started and cases where a new execution time in the special gaming state is started as it is without shifting to the continuous branching state. This makes it possible to diversify the mode in which a new execution round of the special gaming state is started.

As a specific configuration of the feature E10,
"As a condition for enabling the start of a new execution time of the special gaming state, there are a first startable condition and a second startable condition.
When the first startable condition is satisfied, the transition to the continuous branch state is performed when one execution of the special game state is completed, and the special game state is special in the situation where the branch is possible in the continuous branch state. When the transition condition is satisfied, the special transition means starts a new execution round of the special gaming state.
When the second startable condition is satisfied, when one execution round of the special gaming state is completed, a new execution round of the special gaming state is performed by the special continuation means without causing a transition to the continuous branching state. Will be started "
The configuration is conceivable.

Feature E11. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the change display of the picture is stopped, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. It is a composition that the profit of is given to the player,
In the branchable state, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the branch transition correspondence (IV = 16 to 21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the branch transition. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, which is characterized in that it occurs when the machines are stopped in the order of.

According to the feature E11, it is possible to make the timing at which the branchable state occurs in the continuous branching state irregular.

Feature E12. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination in the continuous branching state is the result of the branching transition correspondence, regardless of whether or not the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein both the notification for making the order of branch transition correspondence and the notification for not making the order of branch transition correspondence are executed.

According to the feature E12, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the branch transition correspondence in the continuous branch state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the branchable state depending on the luck of the player. In particular, when the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E4 or the above-mentioned feature E5 is provided, it may be advantageous for the player to continue the continuous branching state, so that the player pays attention to the operation for avoiding the occurrence of the branchable state. It is possible to increase the degree.

Feature E13. When the predetermined transition avoidance operation is performed by the player, the configuration is such that the establishment of the predetermined transition condition is avoided.
When the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, the predetermined transition avoidance notification is performed so that the notification that enables the predetermined transition avoidance operation is performed in the situation where the branch is possible. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, which comprises means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82).

According to the feature E13, even if the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special game state is satisfied in the configuration for shifting to the continuous branching state. It is possible to prevent the predetermined transition condition from being satisfied in such a situation.

Feature E14. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the change display of the picture is stopped, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. It is a composition that the profit of is given to the player,
As for the predetermined transition condition, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence (IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the predetermined transition. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E13, which is established when the machines are stopped in the order of.

According to the feature E14, it is possible to make the timing at which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the continuous branching state irregular.

Feature E15. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition in the situation where the branching is possible, the condition for starting a new execution of the special gaming state is satisfied. For example, it is characterized in that it is provided with a predetermined transition avoidance notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) so that notifications for preventing the order of the predetermined transition correspondence are executed. The gaming machine described in E14.

According to the feature E15, even if the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration for shifting to the continuous branching state. It is possible to prevent the predetermined transition condition from being satisfied in such a situation.

Feature E16. In a situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the branching is possible in the continuous branching state, the normal transition means is used. The gaming machine according to feature E13 or E15, wherein the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, but the advantage for the player is lower than before.

According to the feature E16, even if the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, in the configuration of transitioning to the continuous branching state, even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the situation. Since the transition to the normal gaming state does not occur, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while not losing the benefit of starting a new execution round of the special gaming state. However, if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, the advantage for the player will be lower than before, so the predetermined transition condition It is possible to impose a penalty for the establishment of a predetermined transition condition in a situation where the establishment can be avoided.

Feature E17. The configuration is such that the special transition condition is satisfied when the special transition operation is performed by the player.
When the condition for starting the new execution times of the special gaming state is satisfied, the notification that enables the special transition operation is performed in the situation where the branching is possible, and the new special gaming state is newly executed. When the condition for starting the execution times is not satisfied, the special transition notification means (in the sub-side MPU 82) that notifies for avoiding the occurrence of the special transition operation in the situation where the branch is possible is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E16, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S2214 and S2215).

According to the feature E17, even if the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration for shifting to the continuous branching state. In the situation where the special transition condition is established, it becomes easy to satisfy the special transition condition, and in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied, it becomes possible to prevent the special transition condition from being satisfied. ..

Feature E18. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the change display of the picture is stopped, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. It is a composition that the profit of is given to the player,
As for the special transition condition, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence (IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the special transition. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E17, which is established when the machines are stopped in the order of.

According to the feature E18, it is possible to make the timing at which the special transition condition is satisfied irregular in the continuous branching state.

Feature E19. If the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence in the situation where the branching is possible, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied. If the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is not satisfied, the notification for making the order of the special transition correspondence is executed, and the order of the special transition correspondence is used. The game according to feature E18, which comprises a special transition notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2214 and S2215 in the sub-side MPU82) for executing the notification for preventing the failure. Machine.

According to the feature E19, even if the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied in the configuration for shifting to the continuous branching state. In the situation where the special transition condition is established, it becomes easy to satisfy the special transition condition, and in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied, it becomes possible to prevent the special transition condition from being satisfied. ..

Feature E20. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
A bet number setting means for setting the bet number of the game medium (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion buttons 47 to 49), and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means (start lever 41).
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means in the situation where the bet number corresponding to the predetermined number of game media is set by the bet number setting means, and the stop operation means is operated. Based on this, the pattern display control means (function of executing the reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so that the variation display of the pattern is stopped in the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means. )When,
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. It is a composition that the profit of is given to the player,
The profit corresponding to the winning combination includes the re-game profit that enables the start of a new game round without requiring a new setting of the bet number of the game medium.
In the continuous branching state, the frequency of occurrence of the replay profit in the continuous branching state is not less than the frequency of occurrence of the replay profit in the special gaming state, at least until the branching is possible. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E19.

According to the feature E20, it is possible to make it advantageous for the player that the continuous branching state continues in relation to the frequency of occurrence of the re-game profit.

Feature E21. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the change display of the picture is stopped, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. It is a composition that the profit of is given to the player,
As for the predetermined transition condition, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence (IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the predetermined transition. It is established when it is stopped in the order of
As for the special transition condition, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence (IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units corresponds to the special transition. It is established when it is stopped in the order of
The gaming machine is
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, the order of the predetermined transition correspondence is not obtained if the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied. Predetermined transition avoidance notification means (function for executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence, the order of the special transition correspondence is set if the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied. A special transition notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2214 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the notification for making the notification, and
In the continuous branching state, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition correspondence nor the result of the special transition correspondence, the stop order of the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is notified. Specific notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2205 and S2220 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E20.

According to the feature E21, in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution round of the special game state is satisfied, the stop order is notified when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence. At the same time, the stop order is also notified when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence. Then, the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied is higher than the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied. In, the notification of the stop order is easily executed.

In this case, even if the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition correspondence nor the result of the special transition correspondence, the notification of the stop order can be executed. As a result, for example, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the stop order notification in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, and for example, a new execution state of the special gaming state. Even in a situation where the condition for starting such execution times is not satisfied, it is possible to notify the stop order at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the notification of the stop order being executed in the continuous branching state.

Feature E22. In a situation where the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, the mode of the stop result of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is stopped according to the stop order is the mode of the lottery process of the combination. The result is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, and the mode is indistinguishable from the mode of the stop result of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order different from the order of the predetermined transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to the feature E21.

According to the feature E22, even if the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, whether or not it is the stop order for avoiding the establishment of the predetermined transition condition from the stop result of the variation display of the picture in the picture display means. Cannot be distinguished by the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the stop order notification has been executed in the continuous branching state.

Feature E23. The specific notification means has the feature E21 or E22 that can execute the notification of the stop order at least in the continuous branching state in which the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature E23, the notification of the stop order is executed even if the condition for starting the new execution time of the special game state is not satisfied, so that the new execution time of the special game state is started. Even if the above conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to make the player expect that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started when the notification of the stop order is executed in the continuous branching state. Will be.

Feature E24. The result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the specific transition correspondence (IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode), and the patterns in the plurality of variable display units. When the variable display of is stopped in the order corresponding to the specific transition, the game state is provided with a means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state (bonus RT mode ST5) (a function of executing the process of step S602 in the main MPU 72).
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the specific transition correspondence in the continuous branching state, the specific notification means is so that the notification is executed so as not to be in the order of the specific transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E21 to E23.

According to the feature E24, it is possible to increase the frequency of the stop order notification in the continuous branching state by using the stop order notification executed to prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state from occurring. Will be.

Feature E25. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a specific result (IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode), the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is displayed. It is a configuration in which the transition of the game state does not occur regardless of the stop order.
The specific notification means has one of the features E21 to E24 characterized in that when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result in the continuous branching state, the notification of the stop order can be executed. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature E25, it is possible to increase the frequency of the stop order notification in the continuous branching state by utilizing the situation where the result of the lottery process of the winning combination does not contribute to the transition of the gaming state. Become.

Feature E26. In the specific notification means, when the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to the feature E25, wherein the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed is increased when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result.

According to the feature E26, the higher the frequency of the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to things.

Feature E27. In the specific notification means, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, as compared with the case where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E21 to E26, wherein the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed is increased in the continuous branching state.

According to the feature E27, the higher the frequency of the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to things.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E27, one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. A pattern display means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that variablely displays a pattern on each of a plurality of variable display units, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
The variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display unit corresponding to the stop operation means is operated based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the picture display means so that the change display of the picture is stopped, and
Equipped with
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern on the plurality of variation display units, the winning combination is recognized as the winning combination. In a gaming machine where the profits of
Execution times ending means (in the main MPU 72) for ending one execution time in the special game state when the game times that trigger the end are executed in the special game state (ART state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. (Function to execute the process of step S2025) and
A branch state setting means (a function for executing ART end branch processing in the main MPU 72) for setting a continuous branch state (ART end branch state) when one execution of the special game state is completed, and
In the continuous branching state, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence (IV = 19 to 24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is the order of the predetermined transition correspondence. A normal transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2112 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state when stopped at
In the continuous branching state, the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence (IV = 15 to 18 in the lottery table for the first RT mode), and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is the order of the special transition correspondence. A special transition means (a function of executing the process of step S2108 in the main MPU 72) for starting a new execution round of the special gaming state when the game is stopped at
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, the order of the predetermined transition correspondence is not obtained if the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied. Predetermined transition avoidance notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2211 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence, the order of the special transition correspondence is set if the condition for starting the new execution round of the special gaming state is satisfied. A special transition notification means (a function of executing the process of step S2214 in the sub-side MPU 82) for executing the notification for making the notification, and
In the continuous branching state, when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition correspondence nor the result of the special transition correspondence, the stop order of the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is notified. Specific notification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2205 and S2220 in the sub-side MPU 82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, in the situation where the condition for starting a new execution round of the special game state is satisfied, the stop order is notified when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence. At the same time, the stop order is also notified when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the special transition correspondence. Then, the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is satisfied is higher than the situation in which the condition for starting a new execution time in the special gaming state is not satisfied. In, the notification of the stop order is easily executed.

In this case, even if the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is neither the result of the predetermined transition correspondence nor the result of the special transition correspondence, the notification of the stop order can be executed. As a result, for example, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the stop order notification in a situation where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, and for example, a new execution state of the special gaming state. Even in a situation where the condition for starting such execution times is not satisfied, it is possible to notify the stop order at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the notification of the stop order being executed in the continuous branching state.

Feature F2. In a situation where the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, the mode of the stop result of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is stopped according to the stop order is the mode of the lottery process of the combination. The result is the result of the predetermined transition correspondence, and the mode is indistinguishable from the mode of the stop result of the design when the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is stopped in an order different from the order of the predetermined transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to the feature F1.

According to the feature F2, even if the stop order is notified by the specific notification means, whether or not it is the stop order for avoiding the order corresponding to the predetermined transition from the stop result of the variation display of the picture in the picture display means. Cannot be distinguished by the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the stop order notification has been executed in the continuous branching state.

Feature F3. The specific notification means has the feature F1 or F2 that can execute the notification of the stop order at least in the continuous branching state in which the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature F3, the notification of the stop order is executed even if the condition for starting the new execution time of the special game state is not satisfied, so that the new execution time of the special game state is started. Even if the above conditions are not satisfied, it is possible to make the player expect that a new execution time of the special gaming state will be started when the notification of the stop order is executed in the continuous branching state. Will be.

Features F4. The result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the different transition correspondence (IV = 11 to 14 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode), and the patterns in the plurality of variable display units. When the fluctuation display of is stopped in the order corresponding to another transition, a means (function for executing the process of step S602 in the main MPU 72) for shifting the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state (bonus RT mode ST5) is provided.
When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the result of the different transition correspondence in the continuous branching state, the specific notification means is so that the notification is executed so as not to be in the order of the different transition correspondence. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to increase the frequency of the stop order notification in the continuous branching state by using the stop order notification executed to prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state from occurring. Will be.

Feature F5. When the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is a specific result (IV = 25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, IV = 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode), the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display units is displayed. It is a configuration in which the transition of the game state does not occur regardless of the stop order.
The specific notification means has one of the features F1 to F4 characterized in that when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result in the continuous branching state, the notification of the stop order can be executed. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature F5, it is possible to increase the frequency of the stop order notification in the continuous branching state by utilizing the situation where the result of the lottery process of the winning combination does not contribute to the transition of the gaming state. Become.

Feature F6. In the specific notification means, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, as compared with the case where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. Further, the gaming machine according to the feature F5, wherein when the result of the lottery process of the winning combination is the specific result, the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed is increased.

According to the feature F6, the higher the frequency of the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to things.

Feature F7. In the specific notification means, the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is satisfied, as compared with the case where the condition for starting a new execution time of the special gaming state is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F6, wherein the probability that the notification of the stop order is executed is increased in the continuous branching state.

According to the feature F7, the higher the frequency of the stop order notification is executed, the higher the possibility that a new execution round of the special gaming state is started. Therefore, the stop order notification is executed in the continuous branch state. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to things.

It should be noted that one or more of the features A1 to A42, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D16, the features E1 to E27, and the features F1 to F7 are configured with respect to the configurations of the features F1 to F7. May be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention relating to each feature of the feature A group to the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when a start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means operates. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, the privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... Slot machine, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 45 ... Medal slot, 47-49 ... Credit slot button, 66 ... Image display device, 72 ... Main MPU , 82 ... Sub-side MPU, 101a ... Win / fail result 1st storage area, 102a ... Win / fail result 2nd storage area, 103a ... Win / fail result 3rd storage area, 104a ... Win / fail result 4th storage area.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means that displays the pattern in a variable manner,
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
The stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means, and the stop operation means.
A normal game operation in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the variation display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means that controls the picture display means so as to be performed,
Equipped with
It is a configuration in which the normal game operation is executed at each game time.
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variable display of the pattern by the control of the pattern display control means, the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. In a gaming machine where the corresponding profit is given to the player
A predetermined state setting means for terminating one execution time of the predetermined game state when the game time that triggers the end is executed in the predetermined game state.
An execution determination means for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to a player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed.
The specific state setting means for setting the specific game state in which the start or progress of the normal game operation is restricted, and the specific state setting means.
When it is determined by the execution determining means to grant the privilege to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed, the pattern display is performed in the specific gaming state started before the privilege is granted. It is not determined by the execution determining means that the unit effect corresponding to the grant result is executed by using the pattern in the means, and the privilege is given to the player after one execution of the predetermined gaming state is completed. In that case, in the specific game state started when one execution of the predetermined game state is completed, the unit effect corresponding to the non-granting result is executed by using the pattern in the pattern display means. Execution control means and
Equipped with
The effect execution control means is
In the unit effect corresponding to the grant result, a means for changing the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means from a predetermined pre-start mode to a variable display of the pattern and then setting the stop mode for the grant.
In the unit effect corresponding to the non-granting result, the means for changing the stop mode of the pattern in the pattern display means from the predetermined pre-start mode to the predetermined pre-start mode after the pattern is variedly displayed.
Equipped with
In the unit effect, the variation display of the pattern is performed in a mode different from the variation display mode of the pattern executed in the normal game operation .
The gaming machine characterized in that the unit effect ends independently of the operation of the stop operation means .

Images